2012 Chrysler Town And Country Owner's Guide &
User Manual: 2012-town-&-country
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 652
Download | ![]() |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
2012 Town & Country 2012 OWNER’S MANUAL Chrysler Group LLC 12Y531-126-AA 903751 T&C OM cover.indd 1 First Edition Printed in U.S.A. Town & Country I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3/18/11 7:22 AM VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 10 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INTRODUCTION 1 CONTENTS 䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6 䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about your satisfaction. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INTRODUCTION I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears stamped on the right sliding door sill under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Vehicle Identification Number INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Stamped VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 1 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS 䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 30 ▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 17 ▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 36 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 䡵 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 20 䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 20 ▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . 41 ▫ Using The RKE Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 Sliding Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 ▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . 47 ▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock . . . . . 51 䡵 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 ▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 67 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 ▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 ▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 ▫ Seat Belt Lock Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 75 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 ▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 78 ▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 81 ▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 Commercial Cargo Vehicles (No Factory Installed Rear Seats) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 100 ▫ Restraining Infants And Small Children In Commercial Cargo Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . 103 11 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up. Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position. 1 2 3 4 — OFF — ACCESSORY — ON/RUN — START I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob. The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lower glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking. 2 Emergency Key Removal To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and into the lock cylinder with either side up. then pull the key out with your other hand. Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Power window switches will also remain active for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay setting. Opening the front door will cancel this feature. WARNING! • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. CAUTION! An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. (Continued) Key-In-Ignition Reminder Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after position. the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid SENTRY KEY姞 Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. or unlocked. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote possible by an authorized dealer. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. CAUTION! Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatsystem will shut the engine off in two seconds if an ible with some after-market remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine. problems and loss of security protection. After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authobeen programmed to the vehicle electronics. rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob Replacement Keys is one that has never been programmed. NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it the authorized dealer. cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle. Customer Key Programming CAUTION! Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer. Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and General Information lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15 At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). subject to the following conditions: Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is • This device may not cause harmful interference. required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 • This device must accept any interference that may be Rearming Of The System received, including interference that may cause unde- The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security sired operation. Light flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors present, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau- condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition. thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and To Arm The System power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm: provides both audible and visible signals, for the first three minutes, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound. For an additional 15 minutes, only the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash. 1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for further information). • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙. • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the key is physically removed from the ignition. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of vehicle: the following methods: • Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch • Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless with the driver and/or passenger door open. Entry (RKE) transmitter. • Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further inforKnow Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informamation). tion). • Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position. (RKE) transmitter. 3. If any doors are open, close them. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle). • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle NOTE: • The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Vehicle Security Alarm. If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. door the alarm will sound. Tamper Alert • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. your absence, the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your doors. Check the vehicle for tampering. vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- Security System Manual Override ously described arming sequences has occurred, the The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether doors using the manual door lock plunger. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED • The illuminated entry system will not operate if the The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the dimmer control is in the “dome defeat” position Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the (extreme bottom position). doors or open any door. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the EQUIPPED outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power ther information. liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position. vehicle to activate the system. NOTE: • The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the “Dome ON” position (extreme top position). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into Using The RKE Transmitter the ignition switch disables the system from responding Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UNto any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving LOCK, LOCK and PANIC functions. at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters. Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle. Vehicles built without the powered options will be equipped from the factory with three-button RKE transmitters, and those built with power options will be equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters. Key Fob With Three-Button RKE Transmitter I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Seven-button RKE transmitters will provide functions that allow the same basic operation as the three-button, but may also be used to operate the power liftgate (optional), power sliding doors, Remote Start feature (optional). Some features can be programmed to the customers preferences. For example, flash headlights or sound horn on LOCK. Remote Unlock Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice to unlock all doors and liftgate. This will also turn on the Illuminated Entry system. Remote Key Unlock On First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s side, or all doors, on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. • For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Key Fob With Seven-Button RKE Transmitter I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitUnlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform- ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the ing the following steps: Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. 1. Perform this operation while standing outside the Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle vehicle. Security Alarm. 2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed Remote Lock Doors And Liftgate RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights while still holding the LOCK button. will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. 3. Release both buttons at the same time. 4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed. Sound Horn With Remote Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elecits previous setting. tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un- 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor- its previous setting. mation. NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle following steps: Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the 1. Perform this operation while standing outside the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security vehicle. Alarm. 2. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transUsing The Panic Alarm mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 secTo turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one the LOCK button. second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse 3. Release both buttons at the same time. on and off, and the interior lights will turn on. 4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h). removed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time, you may have to move closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises of the system. 25 If the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, using RKE transmitter to open the power liftgate does not unlock the vehicle or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Power Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door — If • The Panic Alarm cannot be activated if the engine is Equipped Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the running. RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/ Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate. If power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power position. closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position. The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead armed, pressing the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Veconsole. hicle Security Alarm. If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear pillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only. The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door — If Equipped Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/ Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open position. Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock — If Equipped This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnIf the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforarmed, pressing the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button mation. twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Vehicle Security Alarm. • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps: 1. Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed Programming Additional Transmitters RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while contact your authorized dealer for details. still holding the UNLOCK button. Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 3. Release both buttons at the same time. battery. 4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter NOTE: with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate Fob removed. 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board. its previous setting. NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand. 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal. Emergency Key Removal Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together. General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Separating RKE Transmitter 3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions. 1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life of the battery is approximately three years. 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m). • Hood closed • Liftgate closed • Hazard switch off • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) • NOTE: • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic • transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. • • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob • may reduce this range. • How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the • engine will Remote Start: Ignition key removed from ignition switch Battery at an acceptable charge level RKE PANIC button not pressed System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle theft alarm not active Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go) • Shift lever in PARK • Doors closed I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar WARNING! • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled. • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position. To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle. Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema- NOTE: turely: • If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start will automatically lock the doors. • Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • The park lights will turn on and remain on during into the ignition switch and move it to the ON/RUN position), otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of Remote Start mode. 15- minute cycle. • For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release in the Remote Start mode. the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if 15 minutes cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, the ignition switch must be cycled by pushing the press and release the START/STOP button. If the START/STOP button twice (or the ignition switch START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob must be cycled to the ON/RUN position). into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the To Enter The Vehicle After Remote Start ON/RUN position. To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a NOTE: Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. After the in order to drive the vehicle. vehicle is unlocked, you can enter the vehicle, press and release the START/STOP button (or insert the Key Fob • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/ Turn to ON” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Key Fob. Once inserted, the message “Remote Start Cancel Remote Start Active - Key To Run⬙ will display in the EVIC until you Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur: insert and turn the key to the ON/RUN position. • For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter- • The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm N-Go feature, the ignition switch must be in the • Any engine warning lights come on ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle. • Low Fuel Light turns on • For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go feature, the message “Remote Start Active — • The hood is opened Key To Run” will display in the EVIC until you insert • The hazard switch is pressed and turn the key to ON/RUN position. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for • The shift lever is moved out of PARK further information. • The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute • For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go cycle feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push Mode the START/STOP button. Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the If the lock knob is down when you shut either front door, Remote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the Start button to shut down the engine for two seconds vehicle before closing the door. after receiving a valid Remote Start request. When To Reset Remote Start The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without starting. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANIC button was pressed, the vehicle must be reset by cycling the START/STOP button to the ON/RUN position. DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobs on each door trim panel. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Manual Door Lock THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the lock knob is rearward when you shut either side sliding door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door. Sliding Door Lock 35 WARNING! • For personal security and safety in the event of an accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to Power Door Locks — If Equipped A power door lock switch is on each front door trim operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the Key Fob. Driver Power Door Lock Switches If you press the power door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing Front Passenger Power Door Switches 1 - Window Open/Close 2 - Power Door Locks I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the power door is open, the sliding door will lock. door locks (lock or unlock). Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Vewhen the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings authorized dealer per written request of the customer. (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Please see your authorized dealer for service. Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If Equipped The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors closed). NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit features in accordance with local laws. KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. To Unlock From The Driver’s Side: With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked. • If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for an extended period of time, the Passive Entry feature for the handle may time out. Pulling the deactivated front door handle will reactivate the door handle’s Passive Entry feature. • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time. • If you unlock the doors using the Passive Entry door handles, but do NOT pull the handle, the doors will automatically lock after 60 seconds. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. To Unlock From The Passenger Side: With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). 39 To Enter The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, cycle the handle to open the liftgate and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion. NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you the liftgate handle. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is programmed in EVIC, the liftgate will unlock when you cycle the liftgate handle. For further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”. All doors will remain locked when the liftgate release handle is pressed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a the outside of the handles. Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob present in the ignition. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Outside Door Handle Lock Button THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters WINDOWS within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door Power Vent Windows — If Equipped handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all The Power Vent Window Switch located on the driver’s four doors. door trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent windows from the driver’s seat. NOTE: • After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking. • The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead. The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel. Power Vent Window Switch Open/Close I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Power Windows You can control either the front or rear windows using switches located on the driver’s door trim panel. The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay. NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature. Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped The driver may lock out the rear power windows by depressing the bar switch just below the power window switches. Driver’s Power Window Switches I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 2 Power Window Lockout Switch Front Passenger Power Door Switches Front Passenger Power Window Switch There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door trim panel which operates the passenger door window and a set of switches that lock and unlock all doors. The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay. 1 - Window Open/Close 2 - Power Door Locks I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped The front window switches may be equipped with an Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly. To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop. To open the window part way, press the window switch NOTE: part way and release it when you want the window to • If the window runs into any obstacle during autostop. closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window The power window switches remain active for up to switch again to close the window. 10 minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting) after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF. Opening • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger a vehicle front door will cancel this feature. the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoAuto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the Equipped first detent and hold to close window manually. The front driver and front passenger switches may be equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the window path before closing. 45 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open. Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch — If Equipped Second row passengers may open and close the sliding Auto Up Reset — If Equipped door window by a single switch on the door handle To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following assembly. steps after vehicle power is restored: The switches will operate only when the ignition switch 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power completely and continue to hold the switch up for an accessory delay. additional two seconds after the window is closed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The switches will not operate if the driver has Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of activated the Power Window Lockout. pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting. SLIDING SIDE DOOR The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the Sliding Door Power Window Switch NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open, sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle backstopping several inches above the window sill. wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the hold open latch in order to close the door. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol- NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only lowing guidelines: when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the • Always open the door smoothly. fuel door. • Avoid high impacts against the door stop when openPower Sliding Side Door — If Equipped ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle The power sliding door may be opened or is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in closed manually or by using the buttons on the the downhill direction. RKE transmitter, overhead console switch, or • There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the rear door switch. Pulling the inside or outside sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your power sliding door handle will also power open or close sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding the power sliding door. door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must NOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the second time while the sliding door is power opening or exterior handle. power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched closed manually. anytime the vehicle is in motion. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door is fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the door. There are power sliding side door switches located on the b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console for the driver and passengers. Pressing the switch once will open the power sliding door. If the switch is pressed while the door is under a power cycle, the door will reverse direction. Power Sliding Door Switch NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked If the inside or outside door handles are used while the before the power sliding door switches will operate. power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding door feature will be canceled and will go into manual mode. To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats, press the power sliding door I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 master lock button, located in the overhead console, to • If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstrucdisable the switches and handles for the rear seat passentions within the same cycle, the system will automatigers. cally stop, the power sliding door motor will make a clicking sound until the door has no further moveNOTE: ment. This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling • The power sliding side door switches will not open the the inside or outside handle. If this condition occurs, power sliding door if the shift lever is in gear or the no damage is done to the power sliding door motor. vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). To close the The power sliding door must be opened or closed power sliding door with the shift lever in gear and manually. vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), the brake must be pressed. • If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while it is closing or opening, the door will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance. • If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or close position, it will fully open when a power sliding door switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it is fully open and then press the switch again. WARNING! You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear before closing the door. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12 seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be entering or exiting the vehicle. You can turn the feature back on by repeating the previous procedure. Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock Switch To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or and handles may be overridden by pressing the OFF side of the Master Lock Out Switch located in the front disabled by performing the following procedure: overhead console. 1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch. When the power sliding door master lock switch is in the 2. Cycle the ignition switch from ON/RUN to OFF five OFF position, the power sliding side door may not be times ending in the ON/RUN position (do not start the opened or closed by pressing the switch located on the engine). b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the sliding door or 3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the HAZ- activating the inside power sliding door handle. ARD switch ON. 4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system. NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position. To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock 1. Open the sliding side door. Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch 1 — Left Sliding Door 2 — Liftgate 3 — Right Sliding Door 4 — Master Lock I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward NOTE: (toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door • After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is Lock. in the desired position. • When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position) the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the overhead console or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door. Child Protection Door Lock 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door. • The power sliding side door will operate from the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door, regardless of the Child Protection Door Lock lever position. To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding door from the rear seats, press the ⴖOFF” Master Lock Out Switch located in the front overhead console, next to the driver. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision. Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened from the outside door handle or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door when the Child Protection Door Locks are engaged. 53 NOTE: • After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position. • The power sliding side door switches will not open the power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). • The power sliding door will operate from the outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the overhead console, or the switches located on the trim 1. Open the sliding side door. panel just in front of the power sliding door when the shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the child lock lever 2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward position. (away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Protection Door Lock. LIFTGATE 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can equipped). be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors. To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To open the liftgate, press the liftgate release handle Power Liftgate — If Equipped located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitthe liftgate open with one fluid motion. ter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate is fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds, a second time, will close the liftgate. The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by pressing the button located on the overhead console. Liftgate Handle Location I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 2 Overhead Console Master Power Switch Rear Power Liftgate Switch When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button, and several audible beeps will occur to signal that the located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. liftgate is opening or closing. Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button cannot be used to open the liftgate. 1 — Left Door 2 — Liftgate 3 — Right Door 4 — Master Lock I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away. • The power liftgate must be in the full open or close positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must be opened or closed manually. • If the liftgate release button is activated while the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position. NOTE: • If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is • The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically (0 km/h). reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance. • The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures • There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the below ⫺12°F (⫺24°C) or temperatures above 143°F liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these (62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open from the liftgate before pressing any of the power position. liftgate buttons. • During power operation, whether liftgate is fully open or fully closed, the liftgate chime will beep several times indicating power operation is in progress. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS within the same cycle, the system will automatically Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems: stop and must be opened or closed manually. • Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions WARNING! • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode. • Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger • Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located on top of the front seats (integrated into the head restraint) — if equipped • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) that span the front, second, and third row seating for the driver and passengers seated next to a Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. window However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) opening the liftgate in cold weather. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • An energy-absorbing steering column and steering If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether wheel for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupant infant and child restraint systems. For more information • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for enhance occupant protection by managing occupant CHildren (LATCH). energy during an impact event NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage • All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and third row inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different center) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), rates of inflation based on the severity and type of which lock the seat belt webbing into position by collision. extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or risk of harm from a deploying air bag: secure a large item in a seat 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride Please pay close attention to the information in this buckled up in a rear seat. section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. 59 If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 2. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate. 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ. WARNING! • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen inside of the vehicle or being thrown out. far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. WARNING! • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions WARNING! (Continued) • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best. • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. 2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING! Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”. WARNING! • A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 WARNING! Removing Slack From Belt • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a “click”. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is allow the belt to retract fully. comfortable and not resting on your neck. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the large latch plate into the WARNING! buckle until you hear a “click.” The retractor should withdraw any slack in the belt. A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system To release the small latch plate, position the end of the periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. large latch plate against the red button on the small latch Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do plate and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into the not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt headliner. assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seats and the second row outboard seats, the etc.). shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located neck. The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 pushing anywhere on the anchorage. To move the an- you will prefer a higher position. When you release the chorage downward, squeeze the actuation buttons while anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assem- it is locked in position. bly. Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraint” section. The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position. First Row Second Row Third Row Adjustable Anchorage Driver N/A ALR ALR Center N/A N/A Cinch • N/A — Not Applicable As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Passenger ALR ALR ALR 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the passenger seating position is equipped with an position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly ALR and is being used for normal usage: restrained in the rear seat. Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- the entire belt is extracted. ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If now in the Automatic Locking Mode. Equipped How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically preUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is availMode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) able on all passenger-seating positions with a combinalocking mode. tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. 69 Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Refurther reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or collision. a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) — If Equipped These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic. When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work However if during a front impact, a secondary rear The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severwhether the severity, or type of rear impact will require ity and type of the impact. the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 CAUTION! All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision. NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”. Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components 1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim) 2 — Seatback 3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover) 4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR) If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step three of the resetting procedure). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism. 1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat. Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position. 1 — Downward Movement 2 — Rearward Movement I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 2 AHR In Reset Position 3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock NOTE: • If you have difficulties or problems resetting the into the back decorative plastic half. Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer. • For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert姞) BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger (if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened. unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual notification. The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deacOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire tivating BeltAlert威. duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is BeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 extender should be used only if the existing belt is not Seat Belt Lock Out The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that long enough. When it is not required, remove the exwill not allow you to extract the center webbing unless tender and store it. the rear seat upper latch is engaged. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe. WARNING! Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed. Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the the force if there is a collision. driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat Seat Belt Extender belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for panel below the steering column. Advanced Air Bags. The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 3 — Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag 2 — Knee Bolster This vehicle is equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front, I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC • Air Bag Warning Light air bags are located above the side windows and their • Steering Wheel and Column covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG. • Instrument Panel This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag protection for an occupant during a side impact. The • Knee Impact Bolster SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats. • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag NOTE: • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag but they will open during air bag deployment. • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) • After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains authorized dealer immediately. (SABIC) Air Bag System Components • Front and Side Impact Sensors Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components: • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag (Continued) label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label NOTE: • Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy. When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left but they will open during air bag deployment. air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air • Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during bag only. deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The system includes side impact sensors that are cali- Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver require air bag occupant protection. Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact. WARNING! • If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC. The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions. • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. Knee Impact Bolster The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the front passenger, and position the front occupant for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag. Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle. 81 The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air bags, SABs, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and the severity and type of impact. type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protecover time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should collisions depending on the severity and type of collision. have deployed. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci- turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position, or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup. away from an inflating air bag. The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. WARNING! Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. 83 The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of the air bag. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are designed to activate only in certain side collisions. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. collision. A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very are not belted and seated properly, or if items are high speed and with such a high force that it could injure positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag you if you are not seated properly, or if items are inflates. This especially applies to children. The side positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when especially applies to children. it is inflated. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of until the ignition key is turned off. whether or not an air bag should have deployed. • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and removed. SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle. Front And Side Impact Sensors • Unlock the doors automatically. In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System ORC in determining appropriate response to impact functions after an event, the ignition switch must be events. changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF. Enhanced Accident Response System If A Deployment Occurs In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate the communication network remains intact, and the immediately after deployment. power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with ing functions: the air bag system. • Cut off fuel to the engine. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. • The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you. floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. WARNING! They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, immediately. seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air troller (ORC) system serviced as well. bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Maintaining Your Air Bag System 87 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good. Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. were buckled/fastened; In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the such as law enforcement, that have the special equipaccelerator and/or brake pedal; and, ment, can read the information if they have access to the • How fast the vehicle was traveling. vehicle or the EDR. These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. time, including babies and children. Every state in the NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a United States and all Canadian provinces require that non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perlaw, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- Children 12 years or younger should ride properly forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of buckled up in a rear seat. According to crash statistics, personally identifying data routinely acquired during a children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. crash investigation. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardcan become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardmatter how strong you are. The child and others facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be could be badly injured. Any child riding in your used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they size. reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward- held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”. facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. WARNING! I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position. 91 in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over Older Children And Child Restraints the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against Children who are two years old or who have outgrown the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardseat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt. convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who Children Too Large For Booster Seats have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for over the front of the seat when their back is against the as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible. • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesn’t help, move the child to the center rear seating position and use both the lap and shoulder belt. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • A rearward-facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant. NOTE: For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web- Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/ restraint: roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm • Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 you make sure that you can install the child restraint in Installing The Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it. manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many, • The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or weight and height limits. connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the • Carefully follow the instructions that come with the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped not work when you need it. with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap. Not all child restraint systems will be • Buckle the child into the seat according to the child installed as described here. Again, carefully follow the restraint manufacturer’s directions. installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system. WARNING! When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. In general, you will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we row fold-in-floor seats. Second-row seats also feature have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc- tether strap anchorages, located in the rear surface of the tions that come with the child restraint system. seatback. In addition, all third row fold-in-floor seats are equipped with a child restraint tether anchor at the center WARNING! seating position. Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System Each vehicle, except commercial cargo vehicles, is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren. Two LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are installed on all second-row seats and in the center position on all third NOTE: • When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 that the seat belts are not toys and should not be NOTE: It is recommended to loosen the top tether strap played with, and never leave your child unattended in and route it loosely prior to securing the lower anchors so the top tether strap is not trapped between the vehicle the vehicle. seat and child restraint. • If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts. 3. Attach the lower child restraint attachment straps to the vehicle’s lower anchor bars. Ensure that the lower Installing the Lower Attachments: attachment strap is firmly engaged and that the hook is 1. The vehicle lower anchorages are round bars located secure. at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback. 2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower child restraint attachment straps (reference the child restraint seat instructions) to ease the installation. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4. Tighten the lower attachment strap while firmly pushing the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. Remove all slack in the lower attachment straps. Reference the child restraint instructions for information on properly removing slack. LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorages Shown) LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 Installing the Top Tether Strap (with either Lower Anchors or Vehicle Seat Belt): 1. Route the top tether strap under the adjustable head restraint between the steel posts. 2 2. Provide enough slack (reference child restraint instructions) for the tether strap to reach the tether anchor located near the bottom of the seat back. 3. Clip tether hook to tether anchor. Ensure that the hook is firmly engaged and secure. 4. Remove all slack and tighten tether strap according to child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. NOTE: The top tether strap is always to be secured, regardless of if the child restraint is installed with the lower anchors or the vehicle seat belt. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting (Second Row Anchorage Shown) 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown) Installing The Child Restraint Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate to secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Seat then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt Belts in Passenger Seating Positions” section. The chart retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates below defines the seating positions with an Automatic the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate. 2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap Driver Center Passenger portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. First Row N/A N/A ALR Second Row ALR N/A ALR Installing a Child Restraint with a Cinching Latch Plate: Third Row ALR Cinch ALR 1. To install a child restraint with a cinching latch plate, • N/A — Not Applicable first, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor restraint. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR: hear a “click.” 1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough 2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next, pull it tight if necessary. extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. WARNING! NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in a vehicle without rear seats. In an accident, serious injury or death may occur from the deploying passenger airbag. COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLES (NO FACTORY INSTALLED REAR SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children in the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry a child in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seat should be moved to the full rearward position and the child must be in a proper restraint system based on its age, size and weight. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger seat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forwardfacing child restraints equipped with an upper tether strap. Restraining Infants And Small Children In Commercial Cargo Vehicles There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is correct for your child: WARNING! • The forward-facing child seat is for children from about 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one year old. Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag. In an accident, a passenger airbag may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants riding in rearward-facing infant restraints. • A convertible child seat, one that is designed to be used for children who are too heavy for a rearwardfacing infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARD FACING POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLE. When a convertible seat is properly installed facing forward, the vehicle seat should be adjusted to the rear most position. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured in the passenger seat in a child restraint or beltpositioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the rear most position. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat with the seat adjusted to the rearmost position. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. 3. Route the tether strap under the head rest. NOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is centered between the headrest supports underneath the head rest. 4. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat. 5. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions, Tether Installation For Commercial Cargo Vehicles tighten the child restraint tether strap. To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the 6. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions, vehicle, follow the instructions shown: discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any other 1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower condition that might affect the performance of the strap is rear of the front passenger seat. observed, DO NOT USE. Contact your authorized dealership for a replacement part. 2. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the extended tether strap. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with a child restraint only. It should not be used for any other purpose. Before use, inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loose threads. If these or any other condition that might affect the performance of the strap is observed, DO NOT USE that strap. Personal injury may result. Contact your authorized dealership for a replacement part. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. 103 While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. CAUTION! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. 105 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after system. a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the or retractor condition, replace the belt. vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Light plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, The light should come on and remain on for four to eight damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. WARNING! Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING! (Continued) • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners. • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. • If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects 107 lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Door Latches Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . 116 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 116 ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 ▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 120 ▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . 120 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . 120 䡵 Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped . . . . . . . 121 ▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ Outside Mirror Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 118 ▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 ▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 118 䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 129 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 119 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 ▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 ▫ Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster . . . 170 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 147 ▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . 171 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 159 ▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 159 ▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 ▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 ▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 167 ▫ Stow ’n Go威 Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . 176 ▫ Quad Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 ▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . 189 ▫ Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped . . . 191 ▫ Third Row Power Folding Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 ▫ Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 ▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks . . . . . . . 196 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 196 ▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 207 ▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 ▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 ▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 ▫ Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 ▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 ▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 205 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . 205 ▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 206 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 206 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 ▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 210 ▫ Mist, Front Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . 211 ▫ Intermittent, Low And High Speed Wipers . . 211 ▫ Rear Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 ▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 212 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 214 ▫ Parksense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 䡵 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . . 215 ▫ Enabling/Disabling Parksense威 . . . . . . . . . . 225 䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 216 ▫ Service The Parksense威 Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 217 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 220 ▫ Parksense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 ▫ Parksense威 Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 ▫ Cleaning The Parksense威 System . . . . . . . . . 226 ▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 226 䡵 Parkview威 Rear Back Up Camera — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 ▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — With Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 231 ▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — Without Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 232 䡵 Overhead Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 ▫ Front Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 ▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 ▫ Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only) . . . . . . 233 䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 ▫ Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 ▫ Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped . . . . 235 䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 236 ▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . 238 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . 240 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . 241 ▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 ▫ Opening The Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . 246 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 247 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 ▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 ▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 ▫ Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped . . . . 260 䡵 Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped . . . . . . 248 ▫ Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 ▫ Second Row Floor Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . 261 䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 ▫ Storage Bin Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 ▫ Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 ▫ Center And Rear Overhead Console Storage — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 ▫ Super Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 255 ▫ Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 ▫ Coat Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 ▫ Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 ▫ Interior Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 ▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . 258 ▫ Basic Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 ▫ Premium Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 266 ▫ Glove Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 ▫ Super Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 270 ▫ Door Trim Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 䡵 Rear Load-Leveling System — If Equipped . . . 274 ▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 274 䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 ▫ Deploying The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 䡵 Sun Screens — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window. Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield). Manual Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse. 117 CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror. Automatic Dimming Mirror I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror. Outside Mirror Folding Feature All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and normal. Power Mirrors — If Equipped The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side door trim panel. Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted. Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. Driver’s side power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This Power Mirror Controls feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear The power mirror controls consist of mirror select butwindow defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furmirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the ther information. mirror that you want to adjust. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside mirror will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver’s outside mirror will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position. Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position. NOTE: Pressing the power folding mirror switch for more than four seconds, or if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h) will disable the folding feature. If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), they will NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enautomatically unfold. abled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec- Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec- An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer- To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights. Instrument Panel” for further information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 3 Illuminated Mirror Rear Detection Zones BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane • The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends apverify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire vehicles in these areas. time the vehicle is in a forward gear. NOTE: • The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones. The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 3 Sensor Locations BSM Warning Light The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information. The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side of the vehicle. side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate. 3 Overtaking/Passing Overtaking/Approaching I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 125 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes. on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service. Opposing Traffic Stationary Objects I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 WARNING! The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. 3 RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in parking lot situations. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible Blind Spot Alert alarms, including radio muting. When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM WARNING! system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a with both visual and audible alerts when a detected parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, backing up, even when using RCP. Always check the radio is muted. carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back- When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the death. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted. 129 Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems. NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used. NOTE: • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM Astronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable system, the radio is also muted. When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will the appropriate visual alert only. display the message “ Blind spot system unavailableAstronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone. with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is re- Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED quested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, instatus is ignored; the RCP state always requests the vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone alchime. lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone. Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation. The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as websites: long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone • www.chrysler.com/uconnect allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the • www.dodge.com/uconnect system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is available in • www.jeep.com/uconnect English, Spanish, or French languages. • or call 1–877–855–8400 NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for supported phones. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use. All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death. 131 Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the “Operation” section. The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for Uconnect™ Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls (if details. equipped) will contain the two control buttons The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehibutton and Voice Com(Uconnect™ Phone cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone mand button) that will enable you to can be adjusted either from the radio volume control access the system. When you press the button you will knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep switch), if so equipped. is your signal to give a command. The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on certain radios. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™ Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone menu structure. Voice commands are required after most Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options. example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you. • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for Voice Command Tree the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or an- Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. other prompt. Help Command • For certain operations, compound commands can be If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following “Pair a Device”, the following compound command the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”. options at any prompt if you ask for help. • For each feature explanation in this section, only the compound form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the button and follow the audible prompts for directions. Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the radio control head. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Cancel Command • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device” At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and and follow the audible prompts. you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a • You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identifew instances the system will take you back to the fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to previous menu. enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair after the initial pairing process. your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone. • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile To complete the pairing process, you will need to referphone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The given a unique phone name. Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing. • You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven, with one being The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile pairing instructions: phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any • Press the button to begin. given time, only one mobile phone can be in use, • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority “Device Pairing”. allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the • The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three and then dial. The number will appear in the display and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the of certain radios. Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile Call By Saying A Name phone when you make a call. You can select to use a button to begin. lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to • Press the “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section). • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Dial By Saying A Number “Call”. • Press the button to begin. • The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Dial”. the name of the person you want to call. For example, • The system will prompt you to say the number you you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previwant to call. ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook • For example, you can say “234-567-8901”. or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 • The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., then dial the corresponding phone number, which “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will may appear in the display of certain radios. allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired. Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook • When prompted, recite the phone number for the NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is phonebook entry that you are adding. recommended when the vehicle is not in motion. After you are finished adding an entry into the phone• Press the button to begin. book, you will be given the opportunity to add more • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the “Phonebook New Entry”. main menu. • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” instead of “Bob”. The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook • Depending on the maximum number of entries downTransfer From Mobile Phone loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availUconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availnames) and number entries from your mobile phone’s able for use. phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™ phone is accessible. website for supported phones. • Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded. • To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonedownloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in book. “Call by Saying a Name” section. • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next start the vehicle. phone connection. • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect™ Phone. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in NOTE: the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return • Editing names in the phonebook is recommended to the main menu. when the vehicle is not in motion. “Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be phone number to a name entry that already exists in the deleted or edited. phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number, but you can add “John • Press the button to begin. Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Entry” feature. “Phonebook Edit Entry”. Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit. NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion. • Next, choose the number designation (home, work, • Press the button to begin. mobile, or other) that you wish to edit. Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries • When prompted, recite the new phone number for the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phonebook entry that you are editing. “Phonebook Delete”. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose. To select one of the entries button while the from the list, press the Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say “Delete”. Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries • Press the button to begin. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Phonebook Erase All”. • The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook. • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. • After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, • Note that only the phonebook in the current language work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you is deleted. wish to delete. • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be • Note that only the phonebook entry in the current deleted or edited. language is deleted. List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be button to begin. • Press the deleted or edited. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be “Phonebook List Names”. accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with • The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the your mobile service provider for the features that you phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonehave. book entries, if available. Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call • To call one of the names in the list, press the Currently In Progress button during the playing of the desired name, and When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the say “Call”. Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sysNOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the button to accept the call. To reject the call. Press the operations at this point. button until you hear a single call, press and hold the • The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected. number designation you wish to call. Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call • The selected number will be dialed. Currently In Progress Phone Call Features If a call is currently in progress and you have another The following features can be accessed through the incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your call waiting that you normally hear when using your I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mobile phone. Press the button to place the current Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear call on hold and answer the incoming call. a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the bring the call back from hold, press and hold the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call button until you hear a single beep. when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can Toggling Between Calls only answer an incoming call or ignore it. If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In button until you hear a single beep, press the Progress indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls To make a second call while you are currently on a call, have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed time. by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is Conference Call in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling When two calls are in progress (one active and one on button until you hear a Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer hold), press and hold the double beep indicating that the two calls have been to “Conference Call” in this section. joined into one conference call. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Three-Way Calling To initiate three-way calling, press the button while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as described under “Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established, button until you hear a double press and hold the beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call. Call Termination To end a call in progress, momentarily press the button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press button until you hear a single beep. and hold the Redial • Press the button to begin. 141 • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Redial”. • The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone. NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect™ Phone. Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types: • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura- voice commands will be in that language. tion, after which the call is automatically transferred NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone. operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone• An active call is automatically transferred to the book is usable. The paired phone name is not languagemobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF. specific and is usable across all languages. Uconnect™ Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable: Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is using: • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area. • Press the button to begin. If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say operational, you may reach the emergency number as the name of the language you wish to switch to follows: English, Espanol, or Francais. • Press the button to begin. • Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico. 143 WARNING! To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be: • turned on, • paired to the Uconnect™ System, • and have network coverage. NOTE: • The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may Towing Assistance not be applicable with the available mobile service and If you need towing assistance: area. • Press the button to begin. • If supported, this number may be programmable on • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say button and say some systems. To do this, press the “Towing Assistance”. “Setup”, followed by “Emergency”. NOTE: • The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your • The towing assistance number dialed is based on the chances of successfully making a phone call as to that country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528for the mobile phone directly. 2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour Towing Assistance references. Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system. • If supported, this number may be programmable on You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice some systems. To do this, press the button and say mail system or an automated service, such as a paging “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”. service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some Paging instances, that may be too quick for use of the To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated Uconnect™ Phone. Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies, which time out a little too soon to When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone. normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the Voice Mail Calling button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter with Automated Systems”. your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying press the a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”, I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 is also to be used for navigating through an automated Barge In — Overriding Prompts customer service center menu structure, and to leave a The “Voice Command” button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice number on a pager. command immediately. For example, if a prompt is You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager button and say, “Pair a Phone” to could press the entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to select that option without having to listen to the rest of button and say, “Send.” The call and then press the the voice prompt. system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™ Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it). tones over the phone. • Press the button to begin. NOTE: • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say network configurations. This is normal. one of the following: • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time − “Setup Confirmation Prompts On” out settings that are too short and may not allow the − “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off” use of this feature. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc. Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command. NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio. Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF) When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone: • Press the button. • Following the beep, say “Mute”. In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone: • Press the button. • Following the beep, say “Mute off”. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Advanced Phone Connectivity List Paired Mobile Phone Names Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the button Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the and say “Transfer Call”. • Press the 147 button to begin. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing”. • When prompted, say “List Phones”. • The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired button and Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone phone being announced, press the Your mobile phone can be paired with many different say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two secelectronic devices, but can only be actively “connected” tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a with one electronic device at a time. paired phone. If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威 Select Another Mobile Phone connection between your mobile phone and the This feature allows you to select and start using another Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions de- phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone. scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual. • Press the button to begin. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • You can also press the button at any time while the “Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts. list is being played, and then choose the phone you wish to delete. • You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™ you wish to select. Phone • The selected phone will be used for the next phone Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial call. If the selected phone is not available, the To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.” Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near (approximately Voice Training within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle. For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizDelete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™ Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this button to begin. • Press the training mode, follow one of the two following procedures: • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from “Setup Phone Pairing”. radio mode): • At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the • Press and hold the button for five seconds until prompts. the session begins, or, I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 • Press the button and say the “Voice Training, This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, and other settings in all language modes. The System will System Training, or Start Voice Training” command. prompt you before resetting to factory settings. You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and Voice Command phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to best results, the Voice Training session should be comprovide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine console (if equipped) and the mirror. running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • Always wait for the beep before speaking. switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from system will adapt to the last trained voice only. you. Reset • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking button. • press the during a Voice Command period. • After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say • Performance is maximized under: “Setup”, then “Reset”. • low-to-medium blower setting, I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • low road noise, • smooth road surface, • Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar. • fully closed windows, • Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”. • dry weather condition. • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). • Even though the system is designed for users speaking • Even though international dialing for most number in North American English, French, and Spanish accombinations is supported, some shortcut dialing cents, the system may not always work for some. number combinations may not be supported. • When navigating through an automated system such • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of compromised with the convertible top down. speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”. Far End Audio Performance • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is • Audio quality is maximized under: not in motion is recommended. • low-to-medium blower setting, • It is not recommended to store similar sounding • low-to-medium vehicle speed, names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • low road noise, • smooth road surface, • fully closed windows, • dry weather conditions, and • operation from the driver’s seat. 151 Recent Calls If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls. SMS Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on your phone. • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness Read Messages: to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and If you receive a new text message while your phone is not the Uconnect™ Phone. connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced be made to notify you that you have a new text message. by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. If you wish to hear the new message: • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Press the button. compromised with the convertible top down. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “SMS Read” or “Read Messages.” • Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for you. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” List of Preset Messages: the message using Uconnect™ Phone. 1. Yes Send Messages: 2. No You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send 3. Where are you? a new message: • Press the button. 4. I need more direction. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say 5. “SMS Send” or “Send Message.” 6. • You can either say the message you wish to send or say 7. “List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages. 8. button while the To send a message, press the system is listing the message and say “Send.” 9. LOL Why I love you Call me Call me later Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or 10. Thanks number of the person you wish to send the message to. 11. See You in 15 minutes 12. I am on my way I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 13. I’ll be late 14. Are you there yet? 15. Where are we meeting? 16. Can this wait? 17. Bye for now 18. When can we meet 19. Send number to call 153 • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you will then be given a choice to change it. Bluetooth威 Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode. Power-Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the the system from announcing the new incoming mes- system. sages. 20. Start without me • Press the button. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 3 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Primary zero one two three four five six seven eight nine star (*) plus (+) pound (#) add location all Voice Commands Alternate(s) 157 Voice Commands Alternate(s) Primary call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit emergency English erase all Espanol Francais help home I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Primary language list names list phones mobile mute mute off new entry no other pair a phone phone pairing phonebook previous record again redial Voice Commands Alternate(s) pairing phone book Voice Commands Primary Alternate(s) return to main menu return or main menu select phone select send set up phone settings or phone set up towing assistance transfer call Uconnect™ Tutorial try again voice training work yes I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation This Voice Command system allows you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder. 159 NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level. WARNING! Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws. All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death. button, you When you press the Voice Command will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command. NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few seconds, the system will present you with a list of options. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists The system will best recognize your speech if the winbutton, listen dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is options, press the Voice Command set to low. for the beep, and say your command. button while the Pressing the Voice Command system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or change commands. This will become helpful once you start to learn the options. At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your commands, you will be prompted to repeat it. To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Combutton and say “Help” or “Main Menu”. mand Commands NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, The Voice Command system understands two types of “Help” or “Main Menu”. commands. Universal commands are available at all These commands are universal and can be used from any times. Local commands are available if the supported menu. All other commands can be used depending upon radio mode is active. the active application. Changing the Volume When using this system, you should speak clearly and at 1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command a normal speaking volume. button. 2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Radio AM volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for this mode, you may say the following commands: Voice Command is different than the audio system. • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) Main Menu • “Next Station” (to select the next station) Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) menu. • “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) In this mode, you can say the following commands: • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode) Radio FM • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode) To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder) • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) • “Setup” (to switch to system setup) • “Next Station” (to select the next station) • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) Disc To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) Satellite Radio • “Track” (#) (to change the track) To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- • “Next Track” (to play the next track) mands: • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) • “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) spoken number) Memo • “Next Channel” (to select the next channel) To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In • “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel) this mode, you may say the following commands: • “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels) • “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel) • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the recording, you may press the Voice Command button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the following commands: − “Save” (to save the memo) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE − “Continue” (to continue recording) • “Switch to system setup” − “Delete” (to delete the recording) • “Change to setup” 163 • “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Main menu setup” or — During the playback you may press the Voice • “Switch to setup” button to stop playing memos. You Command proceed by saying one of the following commands: In this mode, you may say the following commands: − “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) • “Language English” − “Next” (to play the next memo) • “Language French” − “Previous” (to play the previous memo) • “Language Spanish” − “Delete” (to delete a memo) • “Tutorial” • “Delete All” (to delete all memos) • “Voice Training” Setup NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice To switch to system setup, you may say on of the Command button first and wait for the beep before following: speaking the “Barge In” commands. • “Change to setup” I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Training SEATS For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™ vehicle. Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used. button, say “System 1. Press the Voice Command Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition. 2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” session should be completed when the vehicle is parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. WARNING! • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Seats — If Equipped Some models may be equipped with eight-way power seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The switches control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback. 165 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Driver Power Seat Switch 1 — Seat Switch 2 — Seatback Switch I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. WARNING! (Continued) • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. CAUTION! Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Lumbar — If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. 167 Heated Seats — If Equipped On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. WARNING! 3 • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. (Continued) Power Lumbar Switch I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. Front Heated Seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently. The controls for each heater are located on the switch bank below the climate controls. You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF. Press the switch once to select HIGH-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes. Rear Heated Seats On some models, the second row seats are equipped with heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the Second Row Heated Seat Switch second row passengers to operate the seats indepenYou can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. dently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of side door handle trim panels. heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Press the switch once to select HIGH-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF. Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes. Manual Seat Adjuster I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you For models equipped with manual reclining seats, the have reached the desired position. Then, using body recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat. pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. 3 WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Manual Recline Lever 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. WARNING! The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. Active Head Restraints — Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment can not be Head Restraints readily identified by any markings, only through visual Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be by restricting head movement in the event of a rear split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top and trim, the back half being decorative plastic. of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 173 3 Push Button 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head, pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head. Active Head Restraint (Tilted) NOTE: • The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer. Active Head Restraint (Normal Position) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! • Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death. 175 WARNING! (Continued) • Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. Head Restraints — Second Row Bench To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. Head Restraints — Third Row The head restraint in the center position can be raised and lowered for tether routing. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. Stow ’n Go姞 Seating — If Equipped On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go威 seating, the second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for convenient storage. Push Button I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Second Row Stow ’n Go威 On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go威 seats, the seats will fold and tumble in one motion. 1. Move the front seat fully forward. 2. Recline the front seatback fully forward. 3 3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat. NOTE: Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the armrests are raised. 4. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the “LOCK” position and then pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Storage Bin Cover Lock Release 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on The non-adjustable head restraint and seatback will fold the outboard side of the seat. automatically during the seat tumble. No additional actuation is necessary. Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head Restraint Fold Lever Non-Adjustable Head Restraint I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 The seat will automatically tumble into position for easy storage. 3 Automatic Folding Seatback Tumbled Second Row Seat I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 6. Push the seat into the storage bin. CAUTION! The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover. WARNING! Seat In Storage Bin 7. Close the storage bin cover. In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched. • Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open. • Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion. • Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 1. Return the seatback to the upright position. To Unstow Second Row Seats 1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. 2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors. 3 3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position. 4. Return the head restraint to its upright position, close the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the “Unlocked” position. Stow ’n Go威 Seat — Folded And Latched Position To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched position: return the seatback and head restraint to the upright position. Then pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and tumble seat forward. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Raising The Seatback 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2. Return the head restraint to the upright position. Easy Entry Second Row The second row Stow ’n Go威 seats allow easy entry to the third row seat or rear cargo area. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side of the seat. Raising The Head Restraint 3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and tumble seat forward. Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head Restraint Fold Lever I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 The seat will automatically fold into position for easy entry into the third row. WARNING! In the event of a collision you could be injured if the seat is not fully latched. 3 Quad Seats — If Equipped Both Quad seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat. Manual Seat Adjuster While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Manual Recline To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. Recline Lever WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 Fold-Flat Easy Entry To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward The Quad seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the third row. With the Quad seat in the fold-flat position, the seat cushion. lift up on the easy entry lever located near the bottom of the seat and lift the seat forward. 3 Fold-Flat Quad Seat Easy Entry Lever I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on the strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the seatback and accessing the easy entry lever. To provide additional space behind the second row seats, the seats can be folded forward. With the seat in its fold-flat position, pull upward on the easy-access release lever and lift the seat into the desired position. Pull Strap for Third Row Passengers Fold-Flat Release Lever I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Pull out the retainer strap from the sewn-in pocket Place the strap around the grab handle located on the located on the base of the seat cushion. B-Pillar. Before securing the strap, adjust the buckle for proper fit. 3 Retainer Strap B-Pillar Grab Handle I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Secure the retainer strap to the inside grab handle located on the B-Pillar. When not in use, store the strap in the sewn-in pocket located on the base of the seat cushion. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury: • Retainer strap must always be securely attached to grab handle when seat is folded forward and vehicle is moving. • Never occupy the seat or the center seat behind a seat that has been folded forward. Retainer Strap I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 Removal Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped The Quad seats can be removed if additional storage is While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is needed. With the seat in the easy entry position, lift the removable for added cargo space. cross beam forward and up to release the front anchor latches. 3 Second Row Bench Seat Cross Beam for Seat Removal I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies, near the floor. To remove the seat, squeeze each release handle and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and moved on its Easy Out威 Rollers. To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent positions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate upward until the lock indicator button returns into the handle. WARNING! If not properly latched, the bench seats could become loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstalling these seats, be sure the red indicator button on the release handles return into the handles. Release Handles I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped Third Row Power Folding Seat — If Equipped The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank. for occupant comfort. NOTE: Lower the head restraint by pulling on the release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of the head restraint. Third Row Power Seat Switch Head Restraint Release Strap “1” I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open Left and right third row seats can be folded individually and the vehicle is in PARK. or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to the following positions using the switch bank located on the left rear trim panel: One Touch Folding Seat Third Row The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and unfolding positions for the third row seats. Rear Panel Power Switch Bank 1 — Open to Normal 3 — Tailgate/Fold Flat I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 — Stow 4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 2. Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the NOTE: • Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting the head restraint. to fold/stow the power third row seats. • To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press a different seat position selector switch to stop the seat. Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position can be selected. 3 • The third row power seat system includes obstacle detection for safe operation. When the system detects an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the motion a short distance to move the seat away from the obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle and press the button again, for the desired position. Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped 1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the head restraint down. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Head Restraint Release Strap “1” 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3. Pull release strap marked “2” located on the rear of the 4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the anchors. seat to lower the seatback. Release Strap “3” Release Strap “2” I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 5. Pull release strap marked “4” and tumble the seat rearward into the storage bin. 3 Stowed Third Row Seat To Unfold Third Row Seats Release Strap “4” 1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors latch. 2. Pull release strap marked “2” to unlock the recliner. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3. Pulling strap “4” releases the seatback to return to its full upright position. WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death, never operate the vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in the tailgate mode. 4. Raise the head restraint to its upright position. WARNING! In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully latched. Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods. Tailgate Mode DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED 1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull release strap “4” to The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel rotate the entire seat rearward. can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, driver’s 2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals, and radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless seatback and push forward until the anchors latch. Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE Transmitter To Memory NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered button (1 or 2) is pressed, you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one. 1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system Driver Memory Switch to complete the memory recall before continuing to Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE Step 3. transmitters. Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions. 3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sideview mirror to the desired positions. 4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up 11. Select “Remote Linked to Memory” in the Electronic to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set). Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ 6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding remove the key. Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 7. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the 12. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory driver’s door. position using the other numbered Memory button or to 8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY link another RKE transmitter to memory. button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be Memory Position Recall performed within 5 seconds if you desire to also use a NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory RKE transmitter to recall memory positions. positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not 9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC. transmitters. To recall the memory settings for driver one, press 10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK the ON position. button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 To recall the memory setting for driver two, press 3. Press and release the memory SET (S) button located MEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK on the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling that button on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position you are in the memory set mode. 2. 4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the button 1 on the driver’s door. A chime will sound MEMORY buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S, signaling to you that the driver memory has been set. 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, 5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK driver’s mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of button on the RKE transmitter. A chime will sound one second will occur before another recall can be signaling to you that the RKE transmitter link has been selected. successfully disabled. To Disable RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either Memory 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and Position, repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE transmitter. remove the key. NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked 2. Press and release MEMORY button 1. The system will to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time. recall any memory settings stored in position 1. Wait for Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ the system to complete the memory recall before continu- Customer-Programmable Features⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. ing to Step 3. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat ONLY) This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the key from the ignition switch. • When you remove the key from the ignition switch, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position. between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position. • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit Position. NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If your vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealership • When you remove the key from the ignition switch the can activate/deactivate this feature for you. For details, driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding 2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the safety Your Instrument Panel” for further information. catch lever downward while raising the hood at the same TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD time. To open the hood, two latches must be released. 3 1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument panel, below the steering column. Safety Catch Location Hood Release I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position. CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 12 in (30 cm) and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. LIGHTS All of the lights, except the Hazard Warning lights, headlight high beams and flash-to-pass, are controlled by switches to the left of the steering column on the instrument panel. WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Headlight Switch With Halo Control Assembly UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 Interior Lighting Interior lights are turned on when a door or liftgate is opened, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is activated, or when the dimmer control is moved to the extreme top. 3 The interior lights will automatically turn off in approximately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds every activation thereafter until the engine is started, if one of the following occur: • A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open • Any overhead reading light is left on Dimmer Switch NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or the Interior Lighting Off ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this Rotate the left dimmer control to the off position (extreme bottom). The interior lights will remain off when the feature to operate. doors or liftgate are open. Dimmer Switch The dimmer switch is located next to the headlight switch. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Dimmer Control With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left dimmer control for the interior lights on the instrument panel upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights. Halo Lights — If Equipped Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in locating specific features while driving at night. The Halo control switch is located to the right of the Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) dimmer switch. Rotate the left dimmer control to the first detent. This feature brightens the odometer, radio and overhead displays when the parking lights or headlights are on. Interior Lights On Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the second detent (extreme top position) to turn on the interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position. Halo Switch I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 To activate the Halo lights, rotate the Halo the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise switch control upward or downward to in- position aligning the indicator with AUTO on the headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Time crease or decrease the lighting. Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition Parking Lights Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off, turn the to turn the parking lights on. This also turns on all headlight switch clockwise to the O (Off) position. instrument panel lighting. NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the Automatic mode. Headlights Turn the headlight switch knob to the second Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped detent to turn the headlights and parking lights When your headlights are in the Automatic mode and the on. This also turns on all instrument panel engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn lighting. on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights, on when windshield wipers are on may be found on vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system. rotate the dimmer control up or down. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding This system automatically turns your headlights on or off Your Instrument Panel” for further information. based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they Headlight Delay — If Equipped This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination will turn off in the normal manner. for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle. NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 secTo activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature. while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the Lights-On Reminder headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay interIf the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if the val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled. the driver’s door is opened. When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds or not The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the remain on. To change the timer setting, see your authoengine is started and the transmission is in any gear rized dealer. except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condiThe headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles tion until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of further information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no The battery protection feature will be disabled if the longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate. ignition switch is turned to any other position other than LOCK during the eight minute delay. Front Fog Lights — If Equipped To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking Multifunction Lever lights or the low beam headlights and push in the The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the headlight switch control knob. Pressing the head- steering column. light switch control knob in a second time will turn the front fog lights off. Battery Protection This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing down the battery if the headlights, parking lights, or front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK position and the headlight switch in any position other than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch. Multifunction Lever I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The multifunction lever controls the: • Turn Signals • Headlight Beams Low/High Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off. • Flash-To-Pass (Optical Horn) Turn Signal Warning If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has • Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for approximately Turn Signals 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows sound to alert the driver. on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show High/Low Beam Switch proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multiNOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or function lever toward the instrument panel will switch there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is operation. defective. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Flash-To-Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released. SmartBeam™ — If Equipped The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. 209 2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO (A) position. 3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to “Multifunction Lever” in this section for further information. NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at, or above, 25 mph (40 km/h). To Deactivate Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the SmartBeam™ system. 1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under- 2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. headlights from the high beam to the low beam position. To Activate I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO (A) to the on position. NOTE: Broken, muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly. WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to select the desired wiper speed. NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Washer And Wiper Controls UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 Use one of the five intermittent wiper settings when Mist, Front Wiper And Washer Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving occasional usage of the wipers necessary. speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be Press the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 second the steering column) to the first detent and release for a between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second single wiping cycle. To use the Washer, push on the end (fifth detent). of the lever to the second detent and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed while on the intermittent NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled. wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume Rear Wiper And Washer the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the is pushed while the wipers are in the off position, the rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate wipers will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off. the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray Intermittent, Low And High Speed Wipers until the ring is released, and then resume the intermitRotate the end of the lever to one of the first five detent tent interval. positions for intermittent wiper operation, the sixth deNOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent tent for low wiper operation and the seventh detent for wiper speed only. high wiper operation. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use. The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the operator desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires less wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2 or 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position when not using the system. NOTE: Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the This feature senses moisture on the windshield and wiper speed is in the low or high position. automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried saltwater is present on the windfrom the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate shield. the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this • Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone feature. may reduce rain sensor performance. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 • The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off • Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transVehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings mission shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandthe vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the position. wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the • Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped following conditions: with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start feature will not operate when the ignition is first mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph previously) exist. (0 km/h), or the outside temperature rises above freezing. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Tilt/Telescoping Lever I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm. NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate. The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch bank below the climate controls. WARNING! Press the switch to turn on the heated steering wheel. The light on the switch will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated steering wheel and light indicator. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away Adjustable Pedal Switch from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel. Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward (toward the front of the vehicle). The switch is located on the left side of the steering column. Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward (toward the driver). • The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 • The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in WARNING! REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In- You could lose control and have an accident. Always formation System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked. be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”. When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph CAUTION! (40 km/h). Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal’s path. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at right side of the steering wheel. the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. To Activate Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use. WARNING! Electronic Speed Control Buttons 1 — ON/OFF 4 — CANCEL 2 — RES + 3 — SET - NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. 219 To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button. Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph (2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of To Deactivate the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h). A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set decrease until the button is released. Release the button speed memory. when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed will be established. To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph button and release. Resume can be used at any speed (2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of above 20 mph (32 km/h). the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed. WARNING! Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so EQUIPPED it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear Control. fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense威 System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense姞 Sensors disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is changed to the ON/RUN position. within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal position, the system will remain active until the vehicle direction, depending on the location, type and orientaspeed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or tion of the obstacle. above. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately ParkSense姞 Warning Display The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if 10 mph (16 km/h). Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The ParkSense威 Warning Display is located in the Instru- ParkSense姞 Display ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display audible warnings to indicate the distance between the will turn ON indicating the system status. rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Park Assist System ON ParkSense威 Warning Display I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous. 3 Park Assist System OFF Slow Tone I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Fast Tone Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Distance (in/cm) Audible Alert Chime Display Message Greater than 79 in (200 cm) None Arcs Park Assist System ON None Radio Mute No WARNING ALERTS 79-39 in 39-25 in (200-100 cm) (100-65 cm) Single 1/2 Slow Second Tone Warning Object Warning Object Detected Detected 3 Solid 3 Slow (Continuous) Flashing Yes Yes NOTE: ParkSense威 will MUTE the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. Enabling/Disabling ParkSense姞 ParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled through the Customer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center 225 25-12 in (65-30 cm) Fast Less than 12 in (30 cm) Continuous Warning Object Detected 2 Slow Flashing Yes Warning Object Detected 1 Slow Flashing Yes (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When ParkSense威 is disabled, the instrument cluster will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the EVIC after making sure the rear fascia/bumper is free from snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, see your authorized dealer. Service The ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System is malfunctioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense威 will not operate. If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see your authorized dealer. Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions NOTE: • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 system operating properly. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense威. 227 properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/ bumper. • When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off • Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do key. so can result in the system misinterpreting a close • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the EVIC will PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as the EVIC. long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. • On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense威 • ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered sounding a tone. or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A • Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not an obstacle is behind the vehicle. be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! WARNING! • ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense威. • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. 229 PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView威 camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/ distances for each zone: receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones Zone Red Yellow Green Distance to the rear of the vehicle 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m) 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! 231 CAUTION! (Continued) Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only be used as a parking aid. The camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/ her shoulder when using ParkView威. NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — With Navigation/Multimedia Radio 1. Press the “menu” hard-key. 2. Select “system setup” soft-key. (Continued) 3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting illuminates the instrument panel cupholders, two swiveling LED lights, flip-down sunglass storage, conversa“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key. tion mirror, optional power sliding door switches and an 5. Press the “save” soft-key. optional power liftgate switch. Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — Without NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all of Navigation/Multimedia Radio above except sunglass storage. 1. Press the “menu” hard-key. 2. Select “system setup” soft-key. 3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting “enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key. OVERHEAD CONSOLES Front Overhead Console Two versions of the overhead console are available. The base front overhead console model featured fixed incandescent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass storage and conversation mirror. The premium front overhead console model features a LED focused light that I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Overhead Console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Courtesy/Interior Lighting At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights (standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed. 233 Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only) At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses. From the closed position, press the door latch to open the compartment. The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the outside ring, which is identified with four directional arrows (LED lamps only). The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also illuminated from a light in the overhead console (premium console only). This light is turned on when the headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when the dimmer control is rotated up or down. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Over Door Latch 3 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The door will slowly rotate to the full open position. Conversation Mirror Position NOTE: From the “conversation mirror” position, the From this position, the door can be fully closed or, by door can only be closed. rotating upward about 3/4 of the way and releasing, To return to the full open position, the door must first be positioned for conversation mirror use. closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to Full Open Position release. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed. The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off. You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the outside ring, which is identified with four directional arrows. 3 Reading Lights Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped The rear overhead storage system is available in two versions: with or without sunroof. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines Rear Console Halo Lighting down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode, The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting around the perimeter of the console base. This feature for added convenience. provides additional lighting options while traveling and is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to “Lights/ Halo Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding the Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery. Overhead Compartment Features 1 2 3 4 1 — DVD 1 — Rear HVAC — Interior Lights — Storage If equipped, otherwise storage. 5 6 7 8 — — — — Storage DVD 1 Interior Lights Halo Lighting The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink威 channels. The HomeLink威 indicator is located above the center button. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 3 HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞 Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when before you begin programming. programming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons. For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威 system. Programming A Rolling Code Erase all channels before you begin programming. To For programming garage door openers that were manuerase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威 identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to indicator flashes. open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威 button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button. 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid. 5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can Training The Garage Door Opener usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly 1 — Door Opener 2 — Training Button press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not step after the LEARN button has been pressed. release the button. 6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining steps. activates, programming is complete. NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not Programming A Non-Rolling Code activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995. complete the training. To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons, 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) erase the channels. away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view. To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威 follow these steps: button you want to program and the hand-held transmit1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. ter button. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid. 241 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button release the button. and observe the indicator light. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remainming is complete and the garage door/device ing steps. should activate when the HomeLink威 button is Canadian/Gate Operator Programming pressed. For programming transmitters in Canada/United States • To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons, that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after repeat each step for each remaining button. DO several seconds of transmission. NOT erase the channels. Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this 4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up time-out in the same manner. to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming. It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button door or gate motor. and observe the indicator light. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed. • To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons, 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held NOT erase the channels. transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully programming, plug it back in at this time. trained. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button Security To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn follow these steps: in your vehicle. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not erased. release the button. The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when 3. Without releasing the button proceed with the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and follow all remaining steps. Using HomeLink姞 To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here are some of the most common solutions: • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter. • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code. • Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in? If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. WARNING! • Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 General Information POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console. two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 3 2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. • The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Power Sunroof Switch 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured. • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. Opening Sunroof — Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. Opening The Sunroof — Manual Mode To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again. Closing Sunroof — Express Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second, and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and then stop I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Pinch Protect Override Express Close operation, any movement of the sunroof If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two switch will stop the sunroof. seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode to move toward the closed position. To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially pressed. closed condition until the switch is pushed and held Venting Sunroof — Express forward again. Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will Pinch Protect Feature open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob- Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will struction is detected, the sunroof will automatically re- stop the sunroof. tract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press Sunshade Operation the switch forward and release to Express Close. The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle open. Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch Wind Buffeting will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the door will cancel this feature. ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxirence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs this feature. with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to Sunroof Fully Closed minimize the buffeting or open any window. Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the Sunroof Maintenance sunroof is fully closed. Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED the glass panel. Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located on the lower instrument panel, below the open storage bin. The driver-side power outlet is controlled by the ignition I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 switch and the passenger-side power outlet is connected NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 cigar directly to the battery. The driver-side power outlet will knob and element must be used. also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped CAUTION! with an optional Smoker’s Package). • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Instrument Panel Outlets I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE One outlet in the removable floor console (if equipped) shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument panel and is also connected to the battery. Do not exceed a maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared between the lower panel outlet and the removable floor console outlet. On vehicles equipped with the Super Console the power outlets are located under the retractable cover. To access the power outlets push down on the cover and slide it toward the instrument panel. Super Console Outlets Removable Console Outlet I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both controlled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets can support 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts (13 Amps) for each of these outlets. 3 The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The power outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is powered directly from the battery. Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting. Power Outlet Fuses 1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or with Console Rear 2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or with Console Front 3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or with Console Center I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 CAUTION! (Continued) • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage. 3 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED A 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet (if equipped) converts DC current to AC current, and is located on the left rear trim panel immediately behind the second row left passenger seat. Power Inverter Outlet The power inverter switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls. To turn on the power outlet, press the switch once. Press the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools. CUPHOLDERS There are cupholders located throughout the interior. All liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edge for easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for The power inverter is designed with built-in overload further information. protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once Instrument Panel Cupholders the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-out inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating drawer just above the lower storage bin. exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 Super Console — If Equipped On models equipped with the Super Console, there are two cupholders located in the center of the console. 3 Front Cupholders Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells. The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the container to engage the cupholder retention features. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Super Console Cupholders 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the pull-out drawer, located in the back of the Super Console. Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the cupholders. Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped On models equipped with premium center consoles, there are four cupholders located on the top of the console. Rear Cupholders Premium Console Cupholders I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 Interior Bottle Holders There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommodates up to a 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottle. 3 WARNING! If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury. Interior Bottle Holder Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating. The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes, toys, games or MP3 players, etc. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one of the two cupholders in the center front instrument panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning and/or storage. Upper Glove Compartment To open the upper compartment, press in on the button, located on the left side of the upper door. The door will automatically open. The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired. STORAGE Glove Compartments Upper and lower glove compartments are located on the passenger side of the instrument panel. Upper Compartment To close the compartment door, push downward on the door’s surface to latch the door closed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 Lower Glove Compartment Door Trim Panel Storage To open the lower compartment pull out on the release Front Door Storage handle. Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for storage. WARNING! If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury. Lower Compartment I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped Umbrella Holder The drivers seatback has a primary storage pocket on all An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into models and an optional secondary mesh pocket. the left front door entry scuff molding. Driver’s Seatback Storage Umbrella Holder 1 — Bag Holder 2 — Standard Pocket 3 — Mesh Pocket I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Second Row Floor Storage Bins The area below the floor covers, located in front of the second row seats, is available for storage. 261 CAUTION! The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover. 3 WARNING! Storage Bin Cover Lock Release Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙unlocked⬙ position to allow greater access to the storage bin. In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched. • Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open. • Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion. • Do not operate the storage bin covers while the vehicle is in motion. • Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Storage Bin Safety Warning Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: WARNING! • Always close the storage bin covers when your vehicle is unattended. • Do not allow children to have access to the second row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. • In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched. • Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING! (Continued) • Do not operate the storage bin covers while the vehicle is in motion. • Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. CAUTION! The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover. Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever As a security measure, your vehicle may be built with a Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mechanism. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 Center And Rear Overhead Console Storage — If Equipped The overhead storage system comes in several options. 3 Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism. Overhead Console Features 1 2 3 4 1 — DVD 1 — Rear HVAC — Courtesy Lights — Storage If equipped, otherwise storage. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 6 7 8 — — — — Storage DVD 1 Courtesy Lights Halo Lighting 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Coat Hooks Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the vehicle. Cargo Area Storage The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement “Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate closing. Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved slightly forward of the rearmost position. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 CONSOLE FEATURES • Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage There are three consoles available: Basic, Premium and cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are Super. dishwasher safe for cleaning. • The cupholders are removable to access a large storage bin. WARNING! Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music players, and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury. Basic Console Basic Console features consist of the following: • The basic console is removable from the vehicle for additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at the console base. To Remove The Basic Floor Console 1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip. 2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to clear the rear load floor hook. • The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to 3. Remove the console. easily pass through the first row to the second. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console WARNING! 1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly higher than the rear). 2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/ hook. In an accident, serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed. Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched. 3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole Premium Console — If Equipped is centered on the winch hole. The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin, 4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down- sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the bin offers multiple configurations. cover plug. • Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched. ing. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large cups or mugs with handles. • Top tray storage • Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs or other items I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 • Large console center storage will store headphones for Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders the available rear DVD entertainment system or other and a convenient storage tray. items • 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power inside the console for cell phones or other electronics. 3 • Rear occupant accessible • Multiple adjustments • Removable from vehicle for additional floor space. The top and center console sections slide forward and rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for cleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate large size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Console Position 1 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large Dual Storage Bins Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a storage area below. rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides easy access to the storage area below and provides two of the four cupholders for the second row passengers. Console Position 2 Console Position 3 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost To Remove The Premium Floor Console position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of 1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin console. and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers. 2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/ centimeters. 3. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove console. To reinstall the console: 1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly higher than the front). 2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket. Console Position 4 3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting on the floor bracket. 4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated in the rear floor bracket. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched. WARNING! In an accident, serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed. Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched. Super Console — If Equipped The Super Console contains multiple storage areas, front lower pass through, top forward bin, top rearward bin and rear pull out drawer. Front Lower Pass Through The super console contains a pass through storage area The super console tambour doors are opened by pushing down on the finger tabs and sliding the door. The front accessible for both the driver and front passenger. tambour door slides forward, the rear tambour door slides rearward. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 NOTE: The front cupholder light ring and pass through lighting is controlled by a dimming switch located on the instrument panel, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Located in the back of the super console is a storage drawer and cupholders for the rear passengers. Super Console 1 — Front Sliding Tambour Door 2 — Cupholder Light Ring 3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Door Rear Drawer Storage I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CARGO AREA FEATURES Rechargeable Flashlight The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the right side of the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by a lithium battery that recharges when snapped back into place and the vehicle is either running or the key is in the accessory position. Press in on the flashlight to release it. Press And Release I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, REAR WINDOW FEATURES twice for low, and a third time to return to off. Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time. Three-Press Switch NOTE: • You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second time. • To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions. If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The vehicle must be driven to reset the system. ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within the roof rack side rails. If adding cargo, deploy the crossbars. Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars, to maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg). The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle REAR LOAD-LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED plus that on the external rack does not exceed the The automatic load-leveling system will provide a level maximum vehicle load capacity. riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars. NOTE: • Crossbars are error-proofed and cannot be deployed or stowed in the incorrect positions. • To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the side rails when they are not in use. Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Deploying the Crossbars To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with crossbar on the opposite side. CAUTION! Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle. Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw down. Loosening Crossbars I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 3 Stowed Position Deployed Position Then, position the crossbars across the roof. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The crossbars are identical and can be placed in any two of the three deploy positions. Crossbar To Side Rail Installation Once the crossbars are set into position, tighten the thumb screws completely. Deploy Positions – Choose Two Of Three Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars align with the directional arrows on the side rails. Set the crossbars into the deployed positions. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 NOTE: Load should always be secured to crossbars first, with rail tie down loops used as additional securing points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. 3 Tightening Crossbar Stowing the Crossbars Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars, again, taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Crossbars are identical and can be stowed in either rail nest. Once the crossbars are stowed, tighten the thumb screws completely. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Rail Tie Loops 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Check deployed crossbars frequently and retighten thumb screws as necessary. • To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately. • To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars deployed. • The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof, place a blanket or other protective layer between the load and the roof surface. • Long loads which extend over the windshield, such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle. • Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281 WARNING! Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack. SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED Sun screens are available for second and third row seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, Sun Screen Retracted and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. that the sun screens attach to when pulled out. Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top of the window. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Once the screen is completely to the top of the window, To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the attached to the top of the window. base sill. Sun Screen Extended I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS 䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 ▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 䡵 Instrument Cluster — Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 ▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 䡵 Instrument Cluster — Premium . . . . . . . . . . . 289 ▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 290 ▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 ▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 ▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 ▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 ▫ Tire PSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 ▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 ▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . 317 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 ▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 ▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . 318 ▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 336 ▫ Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio (Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/ RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 337 ▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 ▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 328 䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 328 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 328 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 ▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 347 ▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 347 ▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 348 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 352 ▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 285 ▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 ▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 . . . . 363 ▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 ▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 ▫ Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 ▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 ▫ Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 ▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 ▫ Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 ▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 ▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 358 䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia Video Entertainment System (VES)™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 ▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 ▫ Third Row Swivel Screen (If Equipped) . . . . . 373 ▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 ▫ Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 ▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 ▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries . . . . 378 ▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 ▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 ▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries . . . . . . . 380 ▫ Unwired威 Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 ▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones . . . . . . . 397 ▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 ▫ Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 ▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 ▫ Winter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 ▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 ▫ Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 ▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 ▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 4 1 2 3 4 — Air Vents — Instrument Cluster — Shift Lever — Radio 5 6 7 8 — Analog Clock — Upper Glove Compartment — Lower Glove Compartment — Climate Controls 9 — DVD – If Equipped 10 — Storage Bin 11 — Cup Holders 12 — Switch Bank I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 13 14 15 16 — — — — Ignition Switch Hood Release Dimmer Switch Headlight Switch 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM 4 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 4. Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated. 1. Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the either turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signal off. If either indicator flashes accelerator. at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. 2. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog 5. High Beam Indicator lights are on. This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward 3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward This indicator will illuminate when the park yourself (normal position) to return to low beam. lights or headlights are turned on. 6. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero. 291 Message Display Area When the appropriate conditions exist, the following odometer messages will display: door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajar LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required LoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Coolant NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area located in the instrument cluster. This also displays Trip A and Trip B, DTE, MPG or L/100km, OAT (Outside Air Temperature) information to Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Base Cluster, use STEP and RESET button (on steering Display — If Equipped” for further information. wheel) to access or reset the display. For further information refer to “Compass Mini-Trip Computer”. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CHAngE OIL LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles. indicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately gASCAP 12 seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the dependent upon your personal driving style. STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN appear the next time the vehicle is started. position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and noFUSE release the STEP button on the steering wheel. To reset If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the the oil change indicator system (after performing the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or scheduled maintenance), perform the following steps. damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odometer display area. For further information on fuses and 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your not start the engine). Vehicle”. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system within 10 seconds. is not functioning and that service is required. However, 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. the conventional brake system will continue to operate NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced reset. If necessary, repeat these steps. as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the Electronic Vehicle Information Center ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have (EVIC) Display — If Equipped The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- the light inspected by an authorized dealer. tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the 8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If instrument cluster. For further information, refer to Equipped “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and 7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light inflated to the inflation pressure recommended This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the may stay on for as long as four seconds. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when approximately one minute and then remain continuously one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subseAccordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumiquent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the syspossible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also of reasons, including the installation of replacement or reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS to continue to function properly. low tire pressure telltale. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. 9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. NOTE: • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN. 10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when the ignition switch is turned to the when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop ON/RUN position. It should go out with the when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Inthat caused the ESC activation. dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 15. Air Bag Warning Light 11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conturned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on trol (ESC) is off. during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” 12. Speedometer in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for Indicates vehicle speed. further information. 13. Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the 16. Shift Lever Indicator Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the vehicle. automatic transmission. 14. Fuel Gauge NOTE: The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when • You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK. the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. • The highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake 17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. This light will flash at a fast rate for approxiIn this case, the light will remain on until the condition mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake until the vehicle is disarmed. and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. 18. Brake Warning Light The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacThis light monitors various brake functions, ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic including brake fluid level and parking brake system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is application. If the brake light turns on it may indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on indicate that the parking brake is applied, that when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with dropped below a specified level. the anti-lock brake system reservoir. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Select (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift lever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesdetected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light sary. inspected by an authorized dealer. WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 19. Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. 20. Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. CAUTION! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. 301 while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer. If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. 23. Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The 21. Low Fuel Light light should turn on momentarily when the engine When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal (7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A fuel is added. chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns 22. Charging System Light on. This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 24. Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H , this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H , the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool. 25. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off. shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the veIf the light remains lit with the engine running, your hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authonormal, turn the engine off immediately and call for rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is Do In Emergencies” for further information. required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 26. Transmission Temperature Warning Light During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days, the automatic transmission oil may become too hot. When the transmission overheat warning light turns on, you will experience reduced vehicle performance until the automatic transmission cools down. Once the transmission has cooled down and the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally. If the high speed is maintained, the overheating will continue to occur. If the overheating continues, it may become necessary to stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light turns off. 303 CAUTION! Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure. WARNING! If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following: • Radio Information • Fuel Economy • Vehicle Speed • Trip Info • Tire PSI • Vehicle Info • Messages • Units Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • System Setup (Personal Settings) • Turn Menu Off I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP button to scroll upwheel: ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units, System Setup) and sub-menus. DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menus and submenus. EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons SELECT Button The SELECT button allows access to information in EVIC submenus, selects some feature settings, and resets some EVIC features. The EVIC prompts the driver when the SELECT button can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warnBACK Button Press the BACK button to scroll back to a ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall into several categories: previous menu or sub-menu. • Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) message takes control of the main display area for five Displays seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of The EVIC display consists of three sections: the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the 1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line condition that activated it remains active) and can be reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long and outside temperature are displayed. as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the 2. The main display area where the menus and pop up EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this messages are displayed. message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙ 3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom- and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙. eter line. • Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the The main display area will normally display the main condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙ is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are ⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙. • Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this message type are ⬙Memory System Unavailable - Not in Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙. 307 When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages: • Key in ignition • Ignition or Accessory On • Remote start aborted — Door ajar • Remote start aborted — Hood ajar • Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar • Remote start aborted — Fuel low • Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the • Remote start active — Push Start Button white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the • Remote start active — Key to Run middle, and red telltales on the left. • Wrong Key • Damaged Key I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Key not programmed • Service Keyless System • Vehicle Not in Park • LOW WASHER FLUID • Key Left Vehicle • Oil Change Required • Key Not Detected • Check Gascap • Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start • Left Front Turn Signal Light Out • Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime, if vehicle is in • motion) • • Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts • moving) • • Low Tire Pressure • • Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in “Starting And Operating”) • • Turn Signal On • RKE Battery Low Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out Right Front Turn Signal Light Out Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out Park Assist Disabled Service Park Assist System Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not in Park • Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind Spot System has been turned off. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor blockage, electronic interference, or other ⬙temporary⬙ conditions. When this message is displayed both outside rear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic interference is present, the BSM system will illuminate the icon only on the side of interference as long as interference is present. 309 EVIC White Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include: • Electronic Range Select (ERS) Status The shift lever status “5,4,3,2,1” are displayed indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For further information on ERS, refer to “Starting And Operating” • Service Blind Spot System — This message is dis• Electronic Speed Control Ready played to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) This light will turn on when the electronic system is permanently unavailable. The driver will speed control is ready. For further information, receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warnrefer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Undering in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated. If standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.” this message is present see an authorized dealer. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Electronic Speed Control SET This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. For further information, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.” EVIC Amber Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include: to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). • Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator This light will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low. • Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal EVIC Red Telltale Lights (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These fuel is added. telltales include: • Loose Gascap Indicator • Door Ajar If the vehicle diagnostic system determines This light will turn on to indicate that one or that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly more doors may be ajar. installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will display in the telltale display area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on. 311 vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer. If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light This light informs you of a problem with the Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. light will come on when the ignition is first The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb • Charging System Light check. If the light does not come on during starting, have This light shows the status of the electrical charg- the system checked by an authorized dealer. ing system. The light should come on when the If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. • Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for more information. • Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off. CAUTION! Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING! If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style. 313 Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure. Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/ RUN position (Do not start the engine.) 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds. 3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Do Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press not start the engine.) the SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy func2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times tions display in the EVIC: within 10 seconds. • Average Fuel Economy (AVG) 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. • Distance To Empty (DTE) NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Miles Per Gallon (MPG) start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not Average Fuel Economy reset. If necessary, repeat these steps. Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. The Average Fuel Economy can be reset by following the prompt in the EVIC to use the SELECT button. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “zero” for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display. Miles Per Gallon (MPG) This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph Distance To Empty (DTE) form while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with real-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is habits in order to increase fuel economy. determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button. Average Fuel Economy Display I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h. Trip Info Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons to highlight one of the following functions if you want to reset it: Trip A NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the reset. EVIC. Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset. Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark To Reset A Trip Function Reset will only occur while a resettable function is appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has selected (highlighted). Press and hold the SELECT button been selected. to clear the resettable function being displayed. Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) Tire PSI Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire selections below: pressure value at each corner of the graphic. • Coolant Temp Units Displays the actual coolant temperature. Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units” • Oil Temperature displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT Displays the actual oil temperature. button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) can be changed between English and Metric • Oil Pressure units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or Displays the actual oil pressure. down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then • Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Messages # Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Press and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more than one message to step through the remaining stored messages. Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Menu. Compass / Temperature Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature. NOTE: The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving. Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to Automatic Compass Calibration change ignition switch position, current ignition status This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the will be displayed in the lower right corner of the EVIC need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is display to the right of the odometer value. new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting And Operat- display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more ing” for more information. 360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the 4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally. calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the EVIC. NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as 5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now function etc. normally. Manual Compass Calibration — If Equipped If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator Compass Variance does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows: North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where 1. Turn ON the ignition switch. the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly 2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup set, the compass will automatically compensate for the (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached, differences, and provide the most accurate compass then press the SELECT button. heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the compass must be set using the following steps. 3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is displayed in the EVIC. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings. 2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached, then press the SELECT button. 3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance” message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT button. The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC. 4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected, according to the map. 5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit. Compass Variance Map 1. Turn the ignition switch ON. Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup) Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE NOT IN PARK displays when you try to select “System Setup” from the main menu. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙System Setup⬙ is highlighted in the main menu of the EVIC. Then press the SELECT button to enter the System Setup sub-menu. Press and release the UP or DOWN button to select a feature form the following choices: Language When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll through the language choices. Press the SELECT button to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français). Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language. 321 route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destination is reached. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark Nav–Turn By Turn is removed showing the system has been deactivated. When this feature is selected, the navigation system Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Auto Unlock Doors When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. RKE Linked To Memory When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror, and radio settings will return to the memory set position when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If this feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror, and radio settings can only return to the memory set position using the door mounted switch. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. Remote Unlock Sequence When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice, to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of Remote Start Comfort Sys. the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE When this feature is selected and the remote start is transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated. These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. Horn with Remote Start When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. Horn With Remote Lock When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. Flash Lamps with Lock When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic High Beams — If Equipped When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. Refer to “SmartBeam™” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Headlamps with Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only) When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected. NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.” Intermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped When ON is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press and release I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation. Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button Key-Off Power Delay until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing When this feature is selected, the power window that the setting has been selected. switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), Flashers with Sliding Door and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes When this feature is selected the signal lamps activate after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either when power or manual sliding doors are in operation, front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is entering the vehicle. To make your selection, press and highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has that the setting has been selected. been deactivated. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Tilt Mirror In Reverse When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in a reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downward to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. Easy Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the Blind Spot Alert check-mark is removed showing the system has been There are three selections when operating Blind Spot deactivated. Alert (“Blind Spot Alert Lights”, “Blind Spot Alert Lights/CHM”, “Blind Spot Alert Off”). The Blind Spot I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights” mode, when this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights/CHM” mode, in this mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Blind Spot Alert Off” is selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. 327 Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification. Calibrate Compass Refer to “Compass Display” for more information. Compass Variance Refer to “Compass Display” for more information. Turn Menu Off Press and release SELECT to turn the menu off. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/ showing the system has been activated or the check-mark RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED is removed showing the system has been deactivated. NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in of the unit’s faceplate. the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) — If Equipped Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details. Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details. MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES) NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate. Media Center 130 (RES) Operating Instructions — Radio Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) TIME Button Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second and radio frequency. time to turn off the radio. Clock Setting Procedure Electronic Volume Control 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the SCROLL control knob. volume, and to the left decreases it. 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes set at the same volume level as last played. will begin to blink. SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it. 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change. 5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones. Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade. control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the AM/FM Button mid-range tones. Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory. You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice. 331 Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display. Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations). DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes. Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE: • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks. Inserting Compact Disc(s) Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded. CAUTION! • This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism. • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism. • The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded. EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on AM/FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes. SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track. Press the RND button a second time to stop Random TIME Button Play. Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 RW/FF file recording media and formats are limited. When Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricplayer will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or tions. RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Supported Media (Disc Types) The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.) Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than character extension) ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension) mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal • Maximum number of folder levels: 8 CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). • Maximum number of files: 255 Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times. of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name, and will assign The radio uses the following limits for file systems: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file. MPEG Specification MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 335 Sampling Bit Rate (kbps) Frequency (kHz) 320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 48, 44.1, 32 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32 160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 24, 22.05, 16 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8 When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to MPEG-2 Audio an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the Layer 3 following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not VBR bit rate. supported by the radios. Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files. Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers. Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following: Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected. • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX to load than non-multisession discs audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down. • Number of files and folders - Loading times will TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) increase with more files and folders Press this button to change the display to time of day. The To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF). single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO (SALES CODE RES+RSC) 337 Operating Instructions — Radio Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right ACC position to operate the radio. side of the radio faceplate. Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio. Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it. When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it. Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details. Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not Manual located on the DVD for further details. available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If screen. Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature TIME Button (if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further and radio frequency. details. Clock Setting Procedure If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. screen. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text will begin to blink. message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons knob to save time change. causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. AM or FM frequencies. For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the TUNE Control SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS procedure, starting at Step 2. will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones. MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be sePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Music Type information. control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following treble tones. format types: Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth Program Type 16-Digit Character Display time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ No program type or SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the None undefined sound level from the right or left side speakers. Adult Hits Adlt Hit Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time Classical Classicl and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control Classic Rock Cls Rock knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between College College the front and rear speakers. Country Country Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to Foreign Language Language exit setting tone, balance, and fade. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Program Type Information Jazz News Nostalgia Oldies Personality Public Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Talk Rock Soft Soft Rock Soft Rhythm and Blues Sports Talk 16-Digit Character Display Inform Jazz News Nostalga Oldies Persnlty Public R&B Rel Musc Rel Talk Rock Soft Soft Rck Soft R&B Sports Talk Program Type Top 40 Weather 341 16-Digit Character Display Top 40 Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode. If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station. SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items: • Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change. AM/FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/ RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory. You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice. Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display. Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations). DISC/AUX Button Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display NOTE: will show the track number, and index time in minutes • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. position to operate the radio. Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks. CAUTION! • This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism. • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism. • The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded. Inserting Compact Disc(s) Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded. EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. works in a similar manner. NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on AM/FM Button convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. SEEK Button SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press this button while the CD is playing to activate CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting previous selection if the CD is within the first second of change of pace. the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track. CD and MP3 modes. TIME Button Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanPress this button to change the display from a large CD dom Play. playing time display to a small CD playing time display. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 Notes On Playing MP3 Files • Maximum number of files: 255 The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file file recording media and formats are limited. When names and folder names is limited. For large numbers writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to tions. display the file name and folder name and will assign Supported Media (Disc Types) a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.) Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than character extension) ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension) mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. The radio uses the following limits for file systems: • Maximum number of folder levels: 8 Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times. Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file. When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates. MPEG Specification MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 Sampling Bit Rate (kbps) Frequency (kHz) 320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 48, 44.1, 32 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32 160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 24, 22.05, 16 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8 ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios. Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files. LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain by the following: playable files). • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than The folder list will time out after five seconds. CD-R media INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through to load than non-multisession discs the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File • Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available). increase with more files and folders Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode. to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option more and the radio will display song titles for each file. before writing to the disc. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display. Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers. TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition is OFF). Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilRadio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, iary device if the AUX jack is connected. sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chilNOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the limited coverage in Alaska. AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume System Activation down. Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents. 349 using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the radio to exit this screen. Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A Number (ESN/SID) CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio Please have the following information available when mode. calling: Satellite Antenna 1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects Number (ESN/SID). placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause 2. Your Vehicle Identification Number. decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps: the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly ESN/SID Access on or above the antenna. With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Reception Quality SEEK Buttons Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next following reasons: channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will • The vehicle is parked in an underground parking remain tuned to the new channel until you make another structure or under a physical obstacle. selection. Holding either button will bypass channels • Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the without stopping until you release it. form of short audio mutes. SCAN Button • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before concause intermittent reception. tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can button a second time. cause signal blockage. INFO Button Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa(Satellite) Mode tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the ACC position to operate the radio. Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the channel with the same selected Music Type name. direction of the arrows. If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be TUNE Control (Rotary) Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel. SETUP Button MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type following items: mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button • Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This seconds will allow the program format type to be senumber is used to activate, deactivate, or change the lected. Sirius subscription. Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory. You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice. Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display. Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations). Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details. iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/ REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual. iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as an option with these radios. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compart- Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is ment. located in the glove compartment. iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit Apple’s website for software updates. NOTE: • If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for iPod威 or external USB device support capability. • Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control feature to control the connected device. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: USB Connector Port 4 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position where the iPod威 or consumer electronic audio device cable can be routed through without damaging the cable when closing the lid. This allows routing of the cable without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is not available in the glove compartment, route the cable away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the lid to close without damaging the cable. Using This Feature By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to USB port: • The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) information on the radio display. • The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents. Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or • The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), audio device) the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches, as described below. Controlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis- Using Radio Buttons charged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/ To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained. a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/ on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say MP3 control system may charge it to the required level. ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system. 355 • Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track. Play Mode When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play • Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF >> button. mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external • A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will USB device and display data: jump backward or forward respectively, for five • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or seconds. previous track. • Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the • Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button playing a track, skips to the next track or press the during play mode will jump to the next track in the VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙. list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous Track⬙. • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click, will jump to the previous track in the list or • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙ the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL to the next screen of data for that track. Once all screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio. device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or ⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is ON. • Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat Off⬙. List Or Browse Mode During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device. • Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio each track in the current list and then forward to the device or external USB device. next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when it is playing the track, press the • Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockSCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previthe track detail on the radio display. Once the track ous and next tracks. to be played is highlighted on the radio display, • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only): press the TUNE control knob to select and start Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable. • Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line. • During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in “wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) to get to the track faster. • To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode. • In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or external USB device. • Preset 1 – Playlists • Preset 2 – Artists • Preset 3 – Albums • Preset 4 – Genres • Preset 5 – Audiobooks • Preset 6 – Podcasts • LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device sub-menu levels are available on this system. • MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION! • Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines. • Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device, or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device and/or to the connectors. WARNING! Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB device while driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident. Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect™ phone system. Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Streaming Audio”. Play Mode When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™ phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected and played. Selecting Different Audio Device 1. Press PHONE button to begin. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say UCONNECT™ MULTIMEDIA VIDEO ⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙. ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF EQUIPPED 3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Getting Started Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices. • Screen(s) located in the overhead console : Unfold the Next Track overhead LCD screen(s) by pushing the button on the Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the overhead console behind the screen(s). radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track music on your cellular phone. Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the previous track music on your cellular phone. Browse Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the current song that is playing will display info. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Video Entertainment System (VES)™ 4 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position. • Turn on the VES™ player (if equipped on Dual Screen System) by pushing the Power button, located on the far left, or by pressing the button on the Remote Control. • When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD is inserted into the VES™ player, the screen(s) turn(s) on automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins. • For Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 1 (second row) and Channel 2 on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (third row). Refer to the Dual Video Screen section for more information. Play Video Games Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA input jacks (1 set or 2 depending on vehicle) located on the back of the center console or on left side behind the second row seat. 1. Video In – Yellow 2. Left Audio In – White 3. Right Audio In – Red 4. AUX 2 Inputs (If Equipped) 5. Power Outlet 6. Power Inverter I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361 When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™ jacks: NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more information. 4 Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1. Using The Remote Control Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen 1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control. 2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX 1 or 2 (depending which AUX input the gaming console is plugged into), by either pressing Up/Down/Left/ Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER on the Remote Control. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then touch either AUX 1 or AUX 2 in the VES column (depending which AUX input 1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate. is used). To exit press the back arrow soft-key at the top 2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES of the screen. Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen. Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls Select Channel/Screen 1 And AUX 1 In The VES Column Rear VES Soft-key I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363 Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2. Using The Remote Control 1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is playing then only a small banner will appear on the bottom of the screen. 2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/ Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight the desired audio source or repeatedly press the MODE button on the remote until the desired audio source appears on the screen. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 Select FM Mode On The VES Screen 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a video is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and 1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate. choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow 2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES soft-key at the top left of the left screen. Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen. Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The MEDIA Column Rear VES Soft-key I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365 3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate is on Channel 1. the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES)™. 4. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers, • The Remote Control ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2. • The Touch-Screen Radio (If Equipped) Dual Video Screen 4 Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio 1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the radio faceplate (Touch-Screen). 2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Using The Remote Control 1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control. NOTE: • Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown on the left side of the screen. 2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight DISC by • Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by reon the right side of the screen. peatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER. • The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off. Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls 1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate. 2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen. Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367 4 Rear VES Soft-key Select Channel/Screen 1 And DISC In The MEDIA Column 3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key based on the channel you want to change and then the DISC soft-key in the MEDIA NOTE: column. To exit touch the back arrow at the top left of the • To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC screen. tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged. NOTE: The VES™ player has basic DVD control function such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop • Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a DVD is playing brings up basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off the remote control screen functions. 3. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2. 2. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1. Using The Remote Control 1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control. 2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight VES DISC by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by re1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The VES™ peatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER player automatically selects the appropriate mode after on the Remote Control. the disc is recognized and starts playing the DVD. Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player (If Equipped) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369 Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls 1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate. 2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is displayed, touch the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen. 4 Select VES DISC Mode On The VES Screen NOTE: • Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown on the left side of the screen. • Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown on the right side of the screen. • The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Rear VES Soft-key 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in NOTE: the VES column. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key at • To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC the top left of the screen. tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key. • Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged. Select Channel/Screen 1 And DISC In The VES Column Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is Playing Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch are on the same channel. If watching a video on Screen 1 (second row), then Channel 2 could be used for audio. If watching a video on Screen 2 (third row), then Channel 1 could be used for audio. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371 Using The Remote Control 1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and either the Mode Select Screen will display or a small banner will appear at the bottom of the screen. 2. To listen to an audio source on Channel 1 or 2, either press Up/Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight the desired audio source or press the MODE button repeatedly until the desired audio source appears on the screen. 4 Select FM Mode On The VES screen I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 1 while a video is playing on Channel/Screen 2, touch the 1 1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate. soft-key and choose an audio source. To listen to an audio 2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES source on Channel 2 while a video is playing on Controls. If a channel list is displayed, touch the HIDE Channel/Screen 1, touch the 2 soft-key and choose an LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen. audio source. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key at the top left of the screen. Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls Rear VES Soft-key I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373 Third Row Swivel Screen (If Equipped) • The third row screen or Screen 2 has the ability to lower and swivel to face forward. • While the swivel screen is facing forward, the second row screen or Screen 1 must be fully open in order for the swivel screen (Screen 2) to work. 4 Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The MEDIA Column I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System Remote Control • VES is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously. • In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 and the right side equates to Channel 2. • Selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video source will display on the second row screen or Screen 1 and can be heard on Channel 1. • Selecting a video source on Channel 2, the video source will display on the third row screen or Screen 2 and can be heard on Channel 2 Remote Control • Audio can be heard through the headphones even Controls And Indicators when the screen(s) are closed. 1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear audio while the screen is closed, press the Power button to turn the headphone transmitter on. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375 2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is 6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the pressed, the currently affected channel or channel button previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to the start of the current or previous audio track or video is illuminated momentarily. chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu. 3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off. The remote backlighting turns off automatically after five 7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD disc, to select a satellite audio channel from the Station seconds. list, or select playback modes (SCAN/RANDOM for a 4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which CD). channel is being controlled by the remote control. When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the 8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play. remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 9. 䡲 (Stop) – Stops disc play 1 (right side of the screen). When the selector switch is in the Channel 2, position the remote controls the function- 10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode, ality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of the screen). pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the 5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable radio. When listening to compressed audio on a data station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and PROG through the current audio track or video chapter. In Down selects the previous directory. When listening to a menu modes use to navigate in the menu. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL disc in a radio with a multiple-disc changer, PROG Up and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP button to access selects the next disc and PROG Down selects the previ- the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD Setup Menu of this manual.) ous disc. 11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output 16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to for the selected channel. return to the previous screen. When navigating a DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s contents. 12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press 17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous play (䉴) to resume normal play. tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast 13. STATUS – Press to display the current status. rewind through the current audio track or video chapter. 14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected In menu modes use to navigate in the menu. channel. See the Mode Selection section of this manual 18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a for details on changing modes. menu. 15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP 19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the button to access the display settings (see the display next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the next settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select the audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded in the navigate in the menu. DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode is selected I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Remote Control Storage The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back into position. 4 The Remote Control Storage I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 377 378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Locking The Remote Control All remote control functionality can be disabled as a parental control feature. • To disable the Remote Control from making any changes, follow the radio’s instructions (select menu, rear VES, lock). If the vehicle is not equipped with a DVD player, follow the radio’s instructions to turn Video Lock on. The radio and the video screen(s) indicate when Video Lock is active. • Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown. • Replace the battery compartment cover. Headphones Operation The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screen. Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to • Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition do so for themselves. OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control operation of the VES™. If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control, verify that the screen is turned on and in the down Replacing The Remote Control Batteries position and that the channel is not muted and the The remote control requires two AAA batteries for opheadphone channel selector switch is on the desired eration. To replace the batteries: channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully • Locate the battery compartment on the back of the charged batteries are installed in the headphones. remote, then slide the battery cover downward. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379 Controls The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup. NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off approximately three minutes after the rear video system is turned off. Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones 1. 2. 3. 4. Volume Control Power Button Channel Selection Switch Power Indicator 1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector switch is in the same position as the headphone selector switch.. NOTE: • When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is Replacing The Headphone Batteries controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries: to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2. • Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the headphones, and then slide the battery cover 3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such downward. as a DVD Video), pressing STATUS shows the status on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the • Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown. MODE button will advance to the next mode. When the mode is in an audio only source (such as FM), the Mode • Replace the battery compartment cover. Selection menu appears on screen. Unwired姞 Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited 4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, Warranty use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers to the available modes and press the ENTER button to the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this select the new mode. particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable. BACK button on the remote control. 2. Press the MODE button on the remote control. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381 How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or as long as you own the Product. consequential damages, so the above limitation may not What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from use is defective in workmanship or materials. jurisdiction to jurisdiction. What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty What Will Unwired威 Do? Unwired威, at its option, will does not cover any damage or defect that results from repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired威 remisuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE through normal use, are specifically not covered (replaceWARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAROR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEWARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If you have any questions or comments regarding your If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared Unwired威 wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293- mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the 3332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com. radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is You may register your Unwired威 wireless headphones changed to a mode that is different from the VES™ online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority 1-888-293-3332. over the VES™ or all radio modes (FM, AM, and SAT). The VES™ has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM), System Information SEEK, SCAN, TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as Shared Modes long as it is not in shared mode. This allows the VES™ to output radio sources to the headphones and the radio to output VES™ sources to the When in shared disc mode both the radio and the VES™ vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ channel 1 or have control of the video functions. The VES™ has the 2 are in the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be ability to control the following video modes: visible on the radio’s display for that channel, and the 1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track shared icon will be visible on the VES™ screen. When in Up/Down. shared mode, the same audio source is heard in the shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2. 2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track Up/Down). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383 The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes 1. Channel 1 Mode while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the 2. Channel 1 Shared Status radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode. 3. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute Information Mode Display 4. Channel 2 Mode 5. Channel 2 Shared Status 6. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute 7. Channel 1 ENTER Button Action 8. Channel 2 ENTER Button Action 9. Clock 10. Video Lock 11. Not Available / Error 12. Disc Changer Status Information Mode Video Screen Display I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Numeric Keypad Menu screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency, satellite channel, or track number. To enter the desired digit: 1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲, 䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit. 2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote control’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these steps until all digits are entered. 3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and press the remote control’s ENTER button. Numeric Keypad Menu 4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go button and press the remote control’s ENTER button. When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2 Station List Menu shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This control’s MENU button displays a list of all available channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired station, I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385 press the remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing station. To jump through the list more quickly, navigate the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen. commands which control playback of the disc. Using the options you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random Disc Menu play. Display Settings 4 Disc Menu For CDs Video Screen Display Settings I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen. The factory default settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these settings under normal circumstances. Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the screen closed: • Set the audio to the desired source and channel. • Close the video screen. • To change the current audio mode, press the remote control’s MODE button. This will automatically select To change the settings, press the remote control’s navithe next available audio mode without using the Mode gation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then press the Select menu. remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the value for the currently selected item. To reset all values • When the screen is reopened, the video screen will back to the original settings, select the Default Settings automatically turn back on and show the appropriate menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER display menu or media. button. If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the player. desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387 the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If DVD Region Codes audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries The VES™ DVD player and many DVD discs are coded are installed in the headphones. by geographic region. These region codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD Disc Formats The VES™ DVD player is capable of playing the follow- disc does not match the region code for the player, the disc will not play and will be ejected. ing types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter): • DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see DVD Audio Support notes about DVD Region Codes) When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the VES™ DVD player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by • DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only) default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, • Audio Compact Discs (CDs) but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program • CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio material is automatically mixed down to two channels, which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If format files you increase the volume level to account for this change • Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression) in level, remember to lower the volume before changing the disc or to another mode. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Recorded Discs • For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format. Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not supported. The VES™ DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or • The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc. DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not supported. • Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the Video_TS portion of the disc. If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may be cases where the VES™ DVD player may not be able to If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a playable in the VES™ DVD player, check with the disc compatible format and is playable on other players. To recording software publisher for more information about help avoid playback problems, use the following guideburning playable discs. lines when recording discs. • Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are The recommended method for labeling recordable discs (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker. closed are playable. Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the • For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD- disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so DVD player. each track number is unique. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389 • Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1 player will automatically skip the file and begin playAudio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files ing the next available file. from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW). • If you are creating your own files, the recommended • The DVD player always uses the file extension to fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or supported. For both formats, the recommended ⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz. these extensions for any other types of files. • To change the current file, use the remote control’s or • For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported. the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or • Any file that is copy protected (such as those downprevious file. loaded from many online music stores) will not play. • To change the current directory, use the remote conThe DVD player will automatically skip the file and trol’s PROG Up and Down buttons. begin playing the next available file. Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Disc Errors If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message is displayed on the VES™ and Radio displays and the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message. Display Other Language Setup If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track. The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120°F. When this occurs, the DVD player will display ⬙VES High Temp⬙ and will shut off the VES™ displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: DVD Player Language Menu UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391 All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙ setting to • When the entire four-digit code is entered, press the accommodate languages other than Japanese or English. remote control’s ENTER button. If the language code These languages are selected using a special four-digit code. is not valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙*⬙. If the digits are visible after this step, then the language code To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup is valid. Menu. To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD, enter radio disc mode, then DVD setup and follow these Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more additional instructions: language codes, please contact the dealer where the vehicle was purchased. • Using the remote control Up and Down cursor butCode Language Code tons, highlight the Language item you want to edit, Language Dutch 2311 French 1517 and then press the remote control ENTER button. German 1304 Italian 1819 • Using the remote control Down cursor button, select Spanish 1418 the ⬙Other⬙ setting, then press the remote control’s Portuguese 2519 Right cursor button to begin editing the setting. Rating and Password Setup • Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but- The Rating and Password settings work together to tons, select a digit for the current position. After control the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most selecting the digit, press the remote control’s Right DVD-Video discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL them where lower numbers are designated for all audi- The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a ences and higher numbers are designated for more adult password) and the default password is 0000. audiences. When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passenger must enter the correct password using the password entry method described below. To play all discs without requiring a password, set the DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level 1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc. Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible that discs designed for adult audiences can still play without requiring a password. DVD Password Entry I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393 To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • After the four-digit password is entered, press the follow these additional instructions: remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change. • Using the remote control Left and Right cursor buttons, select the Rating tab. • Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then press the remote control’s ENTER button. 4 • Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit, and then press the remote control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits. • After the four-digit password is entered, press the remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is correct, the set password screen is displayed. • Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and the remote control’s Right cursor button to select digits, enter the new password. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: DVD Player Level Menu 394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor follow these additional instructions: buttons, select the new rating level, and then press the remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change. • Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor buttons, select the Rating tab. Product Agreement This product incorporates copyright protection technol• Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then press the remote ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intelleccontrol’s ENTER button. tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection • Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherthe value for the current digit, and then press the wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or remote control’s Right cursor button to select the next disassembly is prohibited. digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four Dolby威 Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured digits. under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, • After the four-digit password is entered, press the ⬙MLP Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed. Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right reserved. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL General Information This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 395 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 4 Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine o’clock positions. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle. Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left-hand switch will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton. The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the CD Player center. The function of the left-hand switch is different, Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next depending on which mode you are in. track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once The following describes the left-hand rocker switch op- will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second eration in each mode. after the current track begins to play. If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no function in this mode. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397 NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective precautions: coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service. surface. 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in wiping from center to edge. your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated ing the disc. by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the or anti-static sprays. antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect™ (if equipped). 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the instrument panel, below the radio. Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System — If Equipped The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions. The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit located on the instrument panel. When the front control is in any position other than rear, the front control operates all the rear functions. The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit operation. Rear Panel mode is automatically selected when the front control is in the Panel mode. When the front unit is in Bi-Level mode, airflow will be emitted from both the upper and lower rear outlets. When the front control is in Floor, Defrost, or Mix modes, airflow will be directed out of the rear floor outlets. With the Three-Zone Temperature Control system, each front seat occupant can independently control the Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning operations coming from the outlets on their side of the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399 2. Rear Blower Control — If Equipped Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the rear system in any mode you select. The rear blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower speeds. To allow the rear overhead control, turn blower knob fully to the left, past The ⬙O⬙ off position. 3. Front Blower Control Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower speeds. Manual Temperature Control 1. Left Front Temperature Control Provides left front seat occupant with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off) position. Blower control should be left in the ⬙ON⬙ position to allow the climate control to either warm or cool the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 7. Front Defrost Mode 4. Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped Provides temperature control for the rear cabin. Turn left Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the maximum blower and temperature settings for best rear cabin. windshield and side window defrosting. 5. Right Front Temperature Control Provides right front seat occupant with independent NOTE: The air conditioning compressor may operate in temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for Mix and Defrost, or a blend of these modes even if the warmer temperature settings. A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use 6. Mix Mode these modes only when necessary. Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in 8. Electronic Rear Window Defrost Press this button to turn on the rear window cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield. equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: • You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second time. • To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. 401 CAUTION! (Continued) • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. 9. Recirculation Control Button Press this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: • In order to prevent fogging, when the Recirculation • If the Recirculation button is pressed when the system button is pressed and the mode control is set to Panel, is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will the A/C will engage automatically. flash 3 times to indicate Recirculation mode is not • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturballowed. ing the mode control selection. • In Floor and Mix mode the system will turn off 10. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Recirculation mode after five minutes of operation. Press and release to change the current setting. You can select Recirculation mode again if desired. The indicator illuminates when ON. • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumumode will cause windows to fog on the inside because lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum from behind the radiator and through the condenser. defogging, select the outside air position. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403 NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center 11. Floor Mode Button Air is directed through the floor outlets with a instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear small amount through the defrost and side window seat passengers. demist outlets. Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to 12. Bi-Level Mode Button Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any temperature. conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the Max A/C upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer For maximum cooling use the A/C and Recirculation air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved mode buttons at the same time. comfort during sunny but cool conditions. Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped 13. Panel Mode Button The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction, overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position. and turned on or off to control airflow. The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and upper outlets. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear Rear Blower Control seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit, located on the instrument panel. center of the vehicle. Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the REAR position do the second row seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed. The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds. This allows the second row seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. Rear Manual Climate Controls 1 – Rear Blower 2 – Rear Temperature 3 – Rear Mode 4 – Rear Climate Control Lock I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION! Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control system through an intake grille, located in the right side trim panel behind the third row seats. The heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The electrical system could overload, causing damage to the blower motor. Rear Temperature Control The rear mode selection REAR, allows the settings to be controlled by the rear mode control knob. 405 When rear controls are locked by the front system, the lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated, and the rear overhead adjustments are inoperable. Rear Mode Control Headliner Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow. Bi-Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets. NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headrotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. cold air, and clockwise for heated air. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped • Front Three-Zone ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants to select individual comfort settings. The Three-Zone ATC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers. The system automatically adjusts the air temperature, the airflow volume, amount of outside air recirculation and the airflow direction. This maintains a comfortable temperature, even under changing conditions. • When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode operation, a comfort temperature can be set by using the temperature up and down buttons, and the auto blower operation will be set automatically. • The system can be controlled manually, if desired. • SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones, allowing one comfort setting (driver setting) for the cabin, if desired. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Front ATC Panel UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning (A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. 407 7. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display This display shows the temperature setting for the right front seat occupant. 8. Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current setting, the 2. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function This display shows the temperature setting for the left will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The front seat occupant. blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected. 3. Mode Display This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel, 9. Passenger Temperature Control Up/Down Button Bi-Level, Floor, Mix). Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or 4. Blower Control Display the lower button for cooler temperature settings. This display shows the current Blower speed selection. 10. Rear Control Button 5. Front Auto Indicator Provides toggle operation between front control screen This indicates when the system is in Front Auto mode. and rear control screen. Push the button to activate the 6. Auto Indicator rear climate control screen and allow the front seat This indicates when the system is in Auto mode. occupants control over the rear climate settings. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 15. Mode Control Button 11. Rear Lock Press and release the Rear Lock button on the front ATC Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, BiLevel, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the panel to lock and unlock the rear climate controls ATC to switch into manual mode. 12. Auto Temperature Control Button Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and 16. Recirculation Control Button the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and Press and release to change the current setting, the release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for indicator illuminates when ON. more information. Performing this function will cause 17. SYNC Button the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic Press and release to control the temperature setting for all modes. three zones from the driver temperature control. 13. Climate Control OFF Button 18. Driver Temperature Control Up/Down Button Press and release to turn the Climate Control OFF. Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the 14. Blower Control There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed in- lower button for cooler temperature settings. creases as you move the control to the right from the lowest blower setting. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409 Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The Front ATC Panel The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls from the front ATC panel. To change the rear system settings: 1. Press ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control functions now operate rear system. 4 2. To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR button again, or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds. Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display 1. Mode Display This display shows the current Mode selection. 2. Rear Temperature Display This display shows the temperature setting for the rear seat occupants. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Blower Control Display This display shows the current Blower speed selection. 4. Rear Auto Indicator This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode. 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. NOTE: • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for 1. Press the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts words Front Auto will illuminate in the front ATC the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide display, along with two temperatures for the driver and comfort as quickly as possible. front passenger. The system will then automatically • The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric regulate the amount of airflow. units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in” customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customersystem to maintain, by adjusting the driver, front passenProgrammable Features” in this Section. ger, and rear seat rotary temperature knobs. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. Automatic Operation I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing the front blower knob setting 411 There are seven fixed blower speeds. Use the outer dial control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise and decreases when you move the control counterclockwise. Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override Blower Control features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by manual mode. adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are NOTE: Each of these features operate independently selected. This allows the front occupants to control the from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually, volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the the temperature doors will continue to operate automatiAuto mode. cally. The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Panel Mode Floor Mode Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction, air is directed through the defrost and side window and turned on or off to control airflow. demister outlets. NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center Mix Mode instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window seat passengers. demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortBi-Level Mode able, while keeping the windshield clear. Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets and defrost outlets. A slight amount of air is Defrost Mode also directed through the side window demister outlets. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level blower and temperature settings for best windshield and mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel side window defrosting. outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Air Conditioning (A/C) The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set to a cool temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A/C system. 413 Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button. Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. A LED will illuminate on the Recirculation control button when Recirculation mode is selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle. NOTE: • If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain NOTE: In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode active to prevent fogging of the windows. may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled autoselect Defrost mode and increase blower speed. matically if this mode is selected. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, near the Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If center of the vehicle. Equipped The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the headliner outlets. The rear system temperature control is on the front ATC panel located on the instrument panel. Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front ATC panel, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear display. The rear temperature and air source are controlled from the front ATC panel. Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off. Rear ATC Control Features 1 - Blower Speed 2 - Rear Temperature I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 - Rear Mode 4 - Rear Temperature Lock UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415 1. Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front NOTE: ATC panel. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock icon • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts in the rear temperature knob. the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide 2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the comfort as quickly as possible. Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs. • The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric 3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in” counterclockwise to AUTO. customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — CustomerOnce the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC Programmable Features” in this Section. System will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort Rear Blower Control level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off, experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low system to function automatically. to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION! Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature Control System through an intake grille, located in the right side trim panel behind the third row seats. The heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor. When rear controls are locked by the front system, the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored. Rear Mode Control Auto Mode The rear system automatically maintains the correct mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occupants. Rear Temperature Control To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower the temperature, and clockwise to increase the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the front ATC panel. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417 Headliner Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow. Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended. Bi-Level Mode Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the Vehicle” for proper coolant selection. floor outlets. Winter Operation NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headmance, make sure the engine cooling system is functionliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance Floor Mode Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper Air comes from the floor outlets. coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window fogging. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Vacation/Storage Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush and snow. Window Fogging Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operating Tips 419 A/C Air Filter On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Refer to “Air Conditioning” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions. 4 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS 䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 ▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 426 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 433 ▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 ▫ Fuel Economy (Econ) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 ▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 ▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . 434 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 431 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 422 STARTING AND OPERATING 䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 464 䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 465 ▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 466 䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . 451 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 452 ▫ Tire Pressures For High-Speed Operation . . . 472 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 452 ▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 ▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 454 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 ▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 474 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 423 ▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 ▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 475 ▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 492 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 ▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 481 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 482 䡵 Flexible Fuel — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 ▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 ▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 487 ▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 ▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 424 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel 䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . 497 ▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . ▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 ▫ Common Towing Definitions ▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 䡵 Recreational Towing 䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. WARNING! • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. (Continued) 425 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear. CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 5 426 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. Keyless Enter-N-Go – If Equipped This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the ENGINE START/STOP button is installed and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transUsing Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start) mitter is in the passenger compartNOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm ment. engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the Installing And Removing The ENGINE accelerator pedal. START/STOP Button Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START Installing The Button position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The 1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch. starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 427 2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the Normal Starting ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable. Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button 3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm position. engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. Removing The Button 1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressfrom the ignition switch for key fob use. ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system 2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after button loose. 10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only prior to the engine starting, press the button again. be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go). START/STOP Button 1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 428 STARTING AND OPERATING 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions – With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position) The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and START. To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps. 3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will • Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position: display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC PARK position, or it could roll. displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”), NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time (engine not running) position and the transmission is in to change the ignition switch to the RUN position PARK, the system will automatically time out after (EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”), 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time OFF position. to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or ⫺29°C) To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended. If Engine Fails To Start WARNING! • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury. (Continued) 429 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 430 STARTING AND OPERATING Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE START/STOP Button) If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. CAUTION! To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. Clearing A Flooded Engine After Starting (Using Fob With Integrated Key) The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will If the engine fails to start after you have followed the decrease as the engine warms up. “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 431 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits CAUTION! quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a Damage to the transmission may occur if the followgrounded, three-wire extension cord. ing precautions are not observed: The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on • Move the shift lever into PARK only after the the driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap vehicle has come to a complete stop. that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the Module. vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. • Do not move the shift lever between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. WARNING! • Before moving the shift lever into any gear, make Remember to disconnect the engine block heater sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution. NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of PARK. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 432 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle. (Continued) Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and once removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 433 This system prevents the key fob from being removed Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode The Fuel Economy (ECON) mode can improve the vehiunless the shift lever is in PARK. cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condiNOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the tions. Press the “econ” switch in the center stack of the key fob in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this instrument panel and a green light will indicate the safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started ECON mode is engaged. and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK position unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. 5 Fuel Economy Mode Switch I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 434 STARTING AND OPERATING When the Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode is engaged, the Six-Speed Automatic Transmission The shift lever position display (located in the instrument vehicle control systems will change the following: panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You • The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of later. the PARK position (Refer to Brake/Transmission Shift • The transmission will skip select gears during shifts to Interlock System in this section). To drive, move the shift allow the engine to operate at lower speeds. lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. • The torque converter clutch will engage at lower The electronically-controlled transmission provides a engine speeds and remain on longer. precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new • The engine idle speed will be lower. vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal • The overall driving performance will be more conser- condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few vative. hundred miles (kilometers). • Some ECON mode functions may be temporarily inhibited based on temperature and other factors. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 435 be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (described later in this section). Moving the shift lever to the left or right (–/ +) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the Shift Lever transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake vehicle in this range. pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears. When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE, lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can parking brake. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 436 STARTING AND OPERATING When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade, and away from the curb on an uphill grade. WARNING! • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward (with the brake pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. • It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 437 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 438 STARTING AND OPERATING • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK. CAUTION! • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the transThe following indicators should be used to ensure that mission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: • When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated. • Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. 439 DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second, third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (described below) to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 440 STARTING AND OPERATING During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level. Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps: 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. 3. Turn the engine OFF. 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. 5. Restart the engine. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. 441 current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top available gear. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to the right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift service is required. lever position indicator in the instrument cluster. Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the WARNING! driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their never shift above third gear, but will shift down into grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident second and first gear normally. or personal injury. You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift lever to the left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the Odometer Screen Display Actual Gear(s) Allowed I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 1 2 3 4 5 6 D 1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6 5 442 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration (engine braking), tap the shift lever to the left (-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down. Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in Overdrive Operation the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during The automatic transmission includes an electronically some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow- NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage ing conditions are present: until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving]. • the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, Because the engine speed is higher when the torque • the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem- converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the perature, transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) • the engine coolant has reached an adequate temperafeature, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will ture, demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and • vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and out of Overdrive. • the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels. 443 Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a layer of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed: 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy. WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.). 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. 3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. 4. Keep the tires properly inflated. 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 444 STARTING AND OPERATING DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so. Flowing/Rising Water CAUTION! WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 445 CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you stranded. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 446 STARTING AND OPERATING POWER STEERING • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steerThe standard power steering system will give you good ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time. vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical system. This noise should be considered normal, and it steering capability if power assist is lost. does not in any way damage the steering system. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. NOTE: • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system. WARNING! Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. CAUTION! Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 447 WARNING! Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power steering fluid. If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 448 STARTING AND OPERATING The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will illuminate. NOTE: • When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle. • This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. Parking Brake When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING! • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) 449 WARNING! (Continued) • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. CAUTION! If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 450 STARTING AND OPERATING ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased of the stop vehicle stability and brake performance under most WARNING! braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent • The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophistiwheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery cated electronic equipment that may be suscepsurfaces. tible to interference caused by improperly inABS is activated during braking under certain road or stalled, or high output radio transmitting stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inequipment. This interference can cause possible clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of debris, or panic stops. such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals. You may experience the following when the brake system • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish goes into anti-lock: their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just short time after the stop) press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. • A clicking sound of solenoid valves • Brake pedal pulsations (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. 451 Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the anti-lock brake system. The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce Warning Light” is not on. accurate signals for the computer. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as possible. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 452 STARTING AND OPERATING wheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS functions similarly to a limited-slip differential, and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic the ESC is in the “Partial Off” mode. brake control system that includes the Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (in Stability Control (ESC), and Hill Start Assist (HSA). the instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon as the These systems complement the Anti-Lock Brake System tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin. This (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle braking capability dur- indicates that the TCS is active. If the indicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator ing emergency braking maneuvers. and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt Traction Control System (TCS) your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount and do not switch off the ESC or TCS. of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Consult with your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! • The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. • The TCS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Brake Assist System (BAS) The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application, and then applies optimum pressure to the 453 brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. WARNING! • The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. • The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 5 454 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than Electronic Stability Control (ESC) appropriate for the steering wheel position. The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering appropriate for the steering wheel position. of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer WARNING! condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the • The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevehicle maintain the desired path. vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. • The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. 455 ESC On This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC on two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC should only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below. ESC Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When ESC Operating Modes in the “Partial Off” mode, ESC will operate without The “ESC Off” switch is located in the center engine torque management. This mode is intended to be switch bank, next to the hazard flasher switch. used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 456 STARTING AND OPERATING again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch. This will ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation. ESC OFF Indicator Light The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving Light” in the instrument cluster will come on with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or when the ignition switch is turned to the ON gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” position. It should turn off with the engine mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situarunning. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off” Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the the vehicle is in motion. vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authoWARNING! rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem In partial ESC mode, the engine power reduction diagnosed and corrected. feature of ESC is disabled. Therefore, enhanced The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lovehicle stability offered by the ESC system is recated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as duced. the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 457 Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. Hill Start Assist (HSA) The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the NOTE: brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” during this short period of time, the system will release and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenbrake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. system will release brake pressure in proportion to the • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in will be ON even if it was turned off previously. the intended direction of travel. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds HSA Activation Criteria when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver activate: that caused the ESC activation. • Vehicle must be stopped. The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the • Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. greater hill. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 458 STARTING AND OPERATING • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., Disabling/Enabling HSA vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back- If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the ing uphill is in REVERSE gear). Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Unthe activation criteria have been met. The system will not derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informaactivate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK. tion. WARNING! There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than 8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps: NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds. 1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight forward). 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. Start the engine. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 5. Release the clutch pedal. 6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left. 7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls) four times within 20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off two times. 8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half-turn to the right. 9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled. 10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it’s previous setting. 459 Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer. WARNING! • If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the brake pedal is released, there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 5 460 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION WARNING! (Continued) • HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. • Failure to follow these warnings may cause the vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide with another vehicle, object or person, and cause serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tire Markings 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades STARTING AND OPERATING 461 NOTE: • LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. • P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaletters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall precedtion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. • European-Metric tire sizing is based on European • Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempodesign standards. Tires designed to this standard have rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Exsize designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. ample: T145/80D18 103M. • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 462 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Size Designation: P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards T or S = Temporary spare tire 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) — Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code — ⬙R⬙ means radial construction — ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction 15 = Rim diameter in inches (in) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 463 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index — A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol — A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions — The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire Light Load (LL) = Light load tire C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 464 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation — This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) —03 means the 3rd week. 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) —01 means the year 2001 — Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 465 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 466 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING This placard tells you important information about the: 1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2) total weight your vehicle can carry 3) tire size designed for your vehicle 4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. 467 axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in this section. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and Loading trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the weight referenced here. the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg” Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section on your vehicle’s placard. of this manual. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 468 STARTING AND OPERATING 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- NOTE: • The following table shows examples on how to calcusengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of of your vehicle with varying seating configurations cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” and number and size of occupants. This table is for amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs • For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs [295 kg]). (392 kg). 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 469 470 STARTING AND OPERATING Safety WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure. WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. 471 Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted, and the tires inspected for signs of wear or visible damage, at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal properly inflated, even when they are under-inflated. wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for CAUTION! earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, alconsumption. ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 472 STARTING AND OPERATING Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Example: If garage temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature is 32°F (0°C), then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range buildup or your tire pressure will be too low. of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with Tire Pressures For High-Speed Operation temperature changes. The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle the Winter. loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original-equipment information, or an authorized tire dealer, for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! High-speed driving, with your vehicle at or above maximum load, is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). Radial-Ply Tires WARNING! 473 Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel – If Equipped Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 474 STARTING AND OPERATING If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching temporary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non-matching temporary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not install more than one non-matching temporary use spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time. Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. 475 your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as Full Size Spare – If Equipped your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the first opportunity. front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 476 STARTING AND OPERATING Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. WARNING! Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. WARNING! • Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. • Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h), or for more than 30 seconds continuously, when you are stuck; and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Tire Spinning When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread Wear Indicators spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h), Tread wear indicators are in the original-equipment tires or for more than 30 seconds continuously, without stopto help you in determining when your tires should be ping. replaced. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 477 Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors, including, but not limited to: • Driving style • Tire pressure • Distance driven WARNING! 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire The tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. with oil, grease and gasoline. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 478 STARTING AND OPERATING Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Please see “Tread Wear Indicators” and “Tire and Loading Information” placard for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. WARNING! • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. 479 TIRE CHAINS Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain manufacturer. NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire. CAUTION! To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: • Use chains on P225/65R16 and P235/60R16 tires only. P225/65R17 tires do not provide adequate clearance. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 5 480 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) • Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use. • Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h). • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. • Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 0.5 mile (0.8 km). • Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry pavement. • Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer, if different from the speed recommended by the vehicle manufacturer. Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest different maximum speeds. This notice applies to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains. SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the (Continued) M+S designation on the tire sidewall. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. 481 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 482 STARTING AND OPERATING The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed. Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the cold inflation tire placard pressure requirements found on the tire placard label located on the driver’s-side B-pillar. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be turned off. The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. 483 For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) tire placard pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire placard pressure value. NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 484 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor. NOTE: • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 485 • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in Warnings The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” the tire. will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a Base System “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will display The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levwill be activated when one or more of the four active els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of Module. each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the vehicle’s recommended cold tire placard pressure value tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain (located on the placard label on the driver’s-side B-Pillar). the proper pressure. The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once The Basic TPMS consists of the following components: the updated tire pressures have been received. • Receiver Module NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information. • TPMS Telltale Warning Light I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 486 STARTING AND OPERATING The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios: Vehicles With Compact Spare 1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire. 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to displayed and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS Light” will turn on. sensors. 3. After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” that affects radio wave signals. will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on 3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around solid. the wheels or wheel housings. 4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) for the TPMS to receive this information. 487 The Premium TPMS consists of the following components: • Receiver Module • Four TPMS Sensors • Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graphics displaying tire pressures • TPMS Telltale Warning Light Premium System – If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rimmounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module. TPMS Low Pressure Warnings The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for a minimum of five NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value(s) and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires. with the low tire(s) flashing. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 488 STARTING AND OPERATING Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value. The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. message is then followed by a graphic display, with - - in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which TPMS Sensor(s) is not being received. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will no longer flash, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will not be present, and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to any of the following scenarios: 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to information. facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors. SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Message The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a that affects radio wave signals. system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS- 3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This text the wheels or wheel housings. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 489 Vehicles With Compact Spare 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. 1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure The EVIC will also display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” in the compact spare tire. message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road is present. In this case, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning message is then followed by a graphic display with limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres- Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on, the sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be displayed, a but they may not be in the correct vehicle position. The chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a system still needs to be serviced as long as the “SERVICE flashing pressure value in the graphic display. TPM SYSTEM” message exists. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 490 STARTING AND OPERATING 4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses: United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRXC4W4MA4 Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2546A-C4W4MA4 NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3.6L Engine 491 Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available. This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, Reformulated Gasoline as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” these engines. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are speLight spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at prove air quality. high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoas hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will proence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. before considering service for the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 492 STARTING AND OPERATING Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle. E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle’s warranty. CAUTION! If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol. • operate in a lean mode • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on • poor engine performance • poor cold start and cold driveability • increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with Problems that result from using gasoline containing E-85 perform the following: Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol • change the engine oil and oil filter are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may • disconnect and reconnect the battery not be covered under warranty. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 493 • drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer) Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional exposure to E-85 fuel. detergents or other additives is not needed under normal MMT In Gasoline conditions and they would result in additional cost. MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline fuel. blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without Fuel System Cautions MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug CAUTION! life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content performance: of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perforthe gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to mance and damage the emissions control system. look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT (Continued) can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 494 STARTING AND OPERATING Carbon Monoxide Warnings CAUTION! (Continued) • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer. NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. • Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. 495 the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles. 5 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED E-85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: E-85 Fuel Cap 496 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on E-85. Ethanol Fuel (E-85) E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. WARNING! Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame. E-85 Badge Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 497 • Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your • you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be than 1/4 full caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline • you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or refueling Techron may be used. When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that: • you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles a period of at least 5 minutes (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formuObserving these precautions will avoid possible hard lated engine oils. These special requirements are included starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting during warm up. Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer requires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the NOTE: • When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C), requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395 you may experience hard starting and rough idle contains additional requirements, developed during exfollowing start up even if the above recommendations tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to are followed. Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 498 STARTING AND OPERATING Starting The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up. Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts. NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C). Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle. Cruising Range Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon (mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation. CAUTION! Maintenance CAUTION! Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 499 NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the fuel door. left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle. ADDING FUEL CAUTION! • Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system. • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. Fuel Filler Cap I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 500 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on. • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. NOTE: • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. • If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a “CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. If the problem continues, the message will appear the • Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking” next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is dealer as soon as possible. properly tightened. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 501 VEHICLE LOADING • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin• Type of Vehicle istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label • Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH) affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar. If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). specified GVWR and GAWR. Vehicle Certification Label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. the driver’s door B-Pillar. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the The label contains the following information: GVWR. • Name of manufacturer Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) • Month and year of manufacture The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles • Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Front rear GAWR. • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Rear I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 502 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added. Tire Size Overloading The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size. service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR. Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size The best way to figure out the total weight of your listed. vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for it is not over the GVWR. all loading conditions up to full GAWR. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles. Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR. Loading To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes operate. 503 CAUTION! Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 504 STARTING AND OPERATING Common Towing Definitions Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) The following trailer towing-related definitions will as- The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle sist you in understanding the following information: and trailer when weighed in combination. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaGross Trailer Weight (GTW) tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all information. cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. 505 that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. This type of Trailer Tongue Weight (TW) hitch is the most popular on the market today and they The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball are commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% trailers. or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider Weight-Distributing Hitch this as part of the load on your vehicle. A weight-distributing system works by applying leverFrontal Area age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the maximum width of the front of a trailer. tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer’s axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 506 STARTING AND OPERATING safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue weights (TW), and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements. WARNING! • An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision. • Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with an authorized hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable authorized Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect) STARTING AND OPERATING 507 5 With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 508 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow, and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATIONS Max. GTW Class (Gross Trailer Wt.) I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg) II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) IV - Extra Heavy 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg) Class Class Class Class Duty Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 509 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain. Max. GTW (Gross Max. Tongue Wt. Trailer Wt.) Up to 2 persons & 8,750 lbs (3 969 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) Luggage 3,600 lbs 360 lbs (163 kg) (1 633 kg)* 3 to 5 persons & 3.6L/Automatic 8,750 lbs (3 969 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) Luggage 3,350 lbs 335 lbs (152 kg) (1 519 kg)* 6 to 7 persons & 8,750 lbs (3 969 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) Luggage 3,000 lbs 300 lbs (136 kg) (1 360 kg)* * For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg). Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. Engine/Transmission GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating) Frontal Area I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 510 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side, which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: • The tongue weight of the trailer. • The weight of any other type of cargo/luggage or equipment put in or on your vehicle. • The weight of the driver and all passengers. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle. 511 CAUTION! (Continued) • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance Towing Requirements Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the train components, the following guidelines are recom- GAWR or GCWR ratings. mended: WARNING! CAUTION! • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. Improper towing can lead to a injury collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 5 512 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision. • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires. • Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels. • GCWR must not be exceeded. • Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded: 1. GVWR 2. GTW 3. GAWR 4. Trailer tongue weight rating for that trailer hitch. (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10% to 15% range of trailer tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.) (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Requirements – Tires • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire. 513 replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits. Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes • Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury. • Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is sures before trailer usage. required when towing a trailer with electronically • Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the brake controller is not required. proper inspection procedure. • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over • When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire 2,000 lbs (907 kg). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 514 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued) If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an collision. WARNING! • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision. Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin or a seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. (Continued) NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 515 The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following four-pin connector and seven-pin connector illustrations. 5 Seven-Pin Connector Four-Pin Connector 1 — Female Pins 2 — Male Pin 3 — Ground 1 2 3 4 — — — — 4 — Park 5 — Left Stop/Turn 6 — Right Stop/Turn I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Battery Backup Lamps Right Stop/Turn Electric Brakes 5 — Ground 6 — Left Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps 516 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy • When using the speed control, if you experience speed traffic. drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Automatic Transmission you can get back to cruising speed. The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear range. Cooling System NOTE: Selecting a lower gear range while operating the To reduce potential for engine and transmission overvehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve heating, take the following actions: performance and extend transmission life by reducing • City Driving excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed. provide better engine braking. The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. • Highway Driving Reduce speed. • Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 517 NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground. RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Recreational towing is not allowed. CAUTION! CAUTION! DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS 䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 ▫ Securing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 ▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 ▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 ▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 䡵 Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 ▫ To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut . . . . . 524 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 ▫ Spare Tire Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 ▫ Spare Tire Removal Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 528 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 ▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the lower center area of the instrument panel. 521 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — slow down. turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down This is an emergency warning system and it should not an impending overheat condition: be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and other motorists. turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. to high. This allows the heater core to act as a NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat may wear down your battery. from the engine cooling system. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 522 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. WARNING! • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523 WARNING! (Continued) • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Jack Location The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area. Turn the two cover latches to release the cover. 6 Jack And Tool Location Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack, jack handle, and tools. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 524 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Spare Tire Removal The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by means of a cable winch mechanism. The “spare tire drive” nut is located on the floor, under a plastic cap at the front of the floor console or under front super console forward bin liner. Spare Tire Location To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut To access the spare tire winch drive nut and lower the spare tire, you will need to refer to one of the following center console configurations. Super Console For vehicles equipped with the Super Console, the spare tire winch assembly drive nut is located beneath the console. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 525 6 Super Console Lower Drawer 2. Open the front drawer to expose the storage compartment. 1 — Lower Drawer 2 — Front Drawer 3 — Front Drawer Liner 1. Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the floor console. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3. Remove the liner from the console’s storage compartment to access the spare tire winch drive nut. Winch Cover Assembly Plug (If Equipped) Spare Tire Tools Drive Nut Access The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be assembled into a spare tire hook; to remove the compact Premium/Base/Cargo Center Console Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug (if equipped) to spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a Winch T-handle; to raise/lower the compact spare tire/ access the winch drive nut. cover assembly. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527 6 Assembled T-handle A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle B — Extension 1 C — Extension 2 Assembling The Spare Tire Hook A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle B — Extension 1 C — Extension 2 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism Spare Tire Removal Instructions The spare tire is located under the vehicle beneath the stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack in the center console area. cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle. CAUTION! The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch. 3. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly, assemble the winch T-handle extensions to form a spare tire hook, and pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle. Spare Tire And Cover 1. Assemble the spare tire tools into a T-handle and place the square end over the spare tire winch drive nut. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529 4. Stand the tire/cover assembly upright and remove the wheel spacer by squeezing the winch retaining tabs together. Push the retainer through the spare tire to release it from the wheel. 6 Pulling Spare Tire NOTE: If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/ cover assembly from under the vehicle. Removing Wheel Spacer I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations For Jacking 4. Place the shift lever into PARK. 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or 5. Turn OFF the ignition. slippery areas. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking WARNING! position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the wheel. vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. 3. Set the parking brake. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jacking Instructions 531 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Jack Warning Label 6 532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of “Tires – General Information” for information about the spare tire, its use, and operation. 1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. Jack Locations 2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle body. Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated. CAUTION! Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533 6 Front Jack Locations Rear Jacking Locations Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body NOTE: In some situations the jack may need to be placed on its side in order to be pushed under the vehicle. and is located 6 in (150 mm) from door edge. Return the jack to its correct orientation once it is under the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! WARNING! Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. 4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right, using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. CAUTION! 5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not 3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub. right until the jack head is properly engaged in the 6. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are nuts. sure the jack is securely engaged. Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535 NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare. 7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left. 8. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut tightness is 102 ft lbs (138 N·m). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station. 9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position. Mounting Spare Tire WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE: Refer to the “Spare Tire Tools” section for instructions on assembling the T-handle. WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. 12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools back in the stowage compartment. 13. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required. Securing The Spare Tire 10. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the 1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a deflated tire in the spare tire location. Have the full- T-handle and fit the winch T-handle over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as possible. turning freely. This will allow enough slack in the cable to 11. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the allow you to pull the wheel spacer out from under the vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to form vehicle. a “T” and fit the winch T-handle over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanism clicks at least three times. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the compact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place provided. 537 3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is down, and place the tire into the spare tire/cover assembly. Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the wheel and spare tire/cover assembly, so that the two retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on the opposite side. CAUTION! CAUTION! The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch. The compact spare tire/cover assembly must be used when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use this cover could drastically reduce the life of the compact spare tire. 2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the spare tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! CAUTION! Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer have been properly extended through the center of the wheel and spare tire/cover assembly. Failure to properly engage both retainer tabs could result in loss of the spare tire and cover assembly, which will cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of vehicle control. The winch mechanism is designed specifically to stow a compact spare tire only. Do not attempt to use the winch to stow the full size flat tire, or any other full-size tire. Vehicle damage may result. Road Tire Installation Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 4. Using the winch T-handle, rotate the drive nut to the 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is 2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle. wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs 5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned correctly against the underside of the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539 4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 — Valve Stem 2 — Valve Notch 3 — Wheel Lug Nut 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 4 — Wheel Cover 5 — Mounting Stud 6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each 3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, each lug nut is 102 ft/lbs (138 N·m). If in doubt about the snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES correct tightness, have them checked with a torque 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack wrench by your authorized dealer or service station. handle counterclockwise. 7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a 4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly wrench while at the end of the handle for increased seated against the wheel. leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of Vehicles Without Wheel Covers each lug nut is 102 ft/lbs (138 N·m). If in doubt about the 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station. 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a nuts. torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541 NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack Preparations For Jump-Start follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of the engine compartment. precautions. CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. 6 WARNING! Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. Positive Battery Post I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on. You can be injured by moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. 3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump-Starting Procedure WARNING! Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543 CAUTION! WARNING! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the the reverse sequence: negative (-) post of the booster battery. 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the battery. discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and 7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable the fuel injection system. from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your 9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. front wheels. Then move the shift lever back and forth If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle between DRIVE and REVERSE. Using minimal accelerayou should have the battery and charging system in- tor pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, is most effective. spected at your authorized dealer. CAUTION! CAUTION! Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) to “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. CAUTION! • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). 545 WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever: 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2. Remove the shift lever override access cover located 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position near the top right of the shift lever in the instrument without starting the engine. panel. 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Using a small screwdriver or similar small, push and hold the override release lever forward. 6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position. 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. 8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover. Shift Lever Override Access Cover I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheels OFF the Ground NONE ALL MODELS If transmission is operable: • Transmission in NEUTRAL Wheel lift Flatbed Rear Front ALL • 25 mph (40 km/h)max speed • 15 miles (24 km) max distance OK BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN equipment designed for the purpose, following equip- position, not the ACC position. ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! • Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Damage to the fascia will occur. • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. • Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result. • If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position, not the LOCK or ACC positions. The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions: • The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL. • The towing distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles (24 km). • The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15 miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15 miles (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flatbed towing is the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equipment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels on 549 the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage will occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. CAUTION! Failure to follow these towing methods can cause severe transmission damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 554 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 554 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 ▫ Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 ▫ Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 595 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 ▫ Front Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 ▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . . 585 䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 ▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 586 䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 ▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 ▫ Quad Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 ▫ Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 ▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 ▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 ▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 䡵 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 600 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L 7 1 2 3 4 5 — Air Filter — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir — Brake Fluid Reservoir — Battery — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a “CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555 For states that require an Inspection and Mainte“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in ”Unnance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informaIndicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not tion. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight- on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing. ened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following: an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. crank or start the engine. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your this test over. authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON you may need to do nothing more than drive your position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II a normal bulb check. system to update. A recheck with the above test routine 4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will may then indicate that the system is now ready. happen: Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced the ignition or start the engine. This means that your before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running. not proceed to the I/M station. b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty. DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. 557 WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control may require servicing or replacement in the future. systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Oil CAUTION! • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center. • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut OFF or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559 American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or been certified by the American loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends Change Engine Oil API Certified engine oils. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. CAUTION! NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or twelve months, whichever occurs first. Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, for further information. indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certificaenvironment. Contact your authorized dealer, service tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number, station, or governmental agency for advice on how and should not be used. where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in Synthetic Engine Oils your area. You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomEngine Oil Filter mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomThe engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes at every engine oil change. are followed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. 561 WARNING! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING! • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. 563 Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage: • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. 565 Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system performance check. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer, or other authorized service facility, using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer-approved A/C System Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants. A/C Air Filter Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567 WARNING! Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result. The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter: 1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents. 2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and lower the door. A/C Air Filter Replacement 3. Pivot the glove compartment downward. 5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of 4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter the housing. cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover. 6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often. hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威 7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position. Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder. Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as Windshield Wiper Blades seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubriwindshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a cated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such as mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulaMOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure tions of salt or road film. quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt removed. Particular attention should also be given to from a dry windshield. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. 569 WARNING! Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necesfew minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or sary. freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR威 All Adding Washer Fluid Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging, compartment and should be checked at regular intervals. and is not harmful to paint or trim. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out any residual water. The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cooling System WARNING! • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition switch is in the ON position. • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery Coolant Checks bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. 571 CAUTION! • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Adding Coolant • Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up anticipated. to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionreplacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainteized water when mixing the water/engine coolant nance period, it is important that you use the same (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the vehicle. engine cooling system. Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOrganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where • The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威 the vehicle is operated. Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and equivalent. will require more frequent coolant changes. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle. 573 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check WARNING! with your local authorities to determine the disposal • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by anicooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up pressure to build up in the cooling system. To any ground spills immediately. prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle. Points To Remember NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporThe radiator normally remains completely full, so there is ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing the If an examination of your engine compartment shows no engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attenevidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be dant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. is satisfactory, the coolant bottle only needs to be checked • Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle. once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to • Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If maintain the proper level, it should be added to the engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents coolant bottle. Do not overfill. of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks. • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine, which contains aluminum components. • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, also keep the front of the condenser clean. • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. 575 Brakes In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency. Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing underhood services, or immediately if the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system failure. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the “FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system. Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. WARNING! • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. Automatic Transmission The automatic transmission and differential assembly are contained within a single housing. The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and the fluid. The six–speed transmission is equipped with a capped dipstick tube. It is sealed and should not be tampered (Continued) with. Your authorized dealer has the necessary tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant may be used. CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion CAUTION! Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, Fluid Level Check which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, The six-speed automatic transmission is a sealed unit and road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme has no dipstick. See your authorized dealer to have the hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will transmission fluid checked or serviced. have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The following maintenance recommendations will enable maintenance intervals. you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the resistance built into your vehicle. fluid and filter should be changed. What Causes Corrosion? Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. The most common causes are: • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation • Stone and gravel impact • Insects, tree sap and tar • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants CAUTION! Washing • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. • If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove. • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch metal and painted surfaces. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Special Care 581 • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer a month. has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels be kept clear and open. Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. considered the responsibility of the owner. To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust the • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar following MOPAR威 wheel cleaners are recommended or cause which destroys the paint and protective coating, select a non-abrasive, non acidic cleaner. have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of • For chrome wheels, use MOPAR威 Chrome Cleaner (Part# 04318013) or equivalent. the owner. • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, • For aluminum wheels, use MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well (Part# 04796239AB) or equivalent. packaged and sealed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Use only the approved MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaners or equivalent. • For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. • For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products. Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If Equipped Interior Care Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manInstrument Panel Surfaces ner: The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not with a clean, dry towel. use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. restore the low glare surface. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583 solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean Cleaning Interior Trim Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condicloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equiva- tioner is not required to maintain the original condition. lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent WARNING! if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. clean vinyl upholstery Many are potentially flammable, and if used in Cleaning Leather Upholstery closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lightweight Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headcleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt lights. can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp Glass Surfaces rag. All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or equivalent or any com- 2. Dry with a soft cloth. mercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abraSeat Belt Maintenance sive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. right rear quarter window equipped with the radio Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or that may scratch the elements. lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585 Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn, or if approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about the buckles do not work properly. six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces Removal Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting with a clean soft cloth. at one edge to ease removal. Installation Cleaning Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the the cleaning procedure below. corresponding openings in the drawer. Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the applicable “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label that identifies each component may be printed or embossed on the inside of the cover. Totally Integrated Power Module I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Cavity • When installing the Totally Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the following table. J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Cartridge Fuse 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 25 Amp Natural 25 Amp Natural 40 Amp Green MiniFuse — 30 Amp Pink — — 587 Description Power Folding Seat — Power Liftgate Module Rear Door Module — Driver Door Node — Passenger Door Node — Antilock Brakes Pump/Stability Control System Antilock Brakes Valve/Stability Control System 7 588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity J8 J9 Cartridge Fuse 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green MiniFuse — — J10 30 Amp Pink — J11 30 Amp Pink — J12 J13 30 Amp Pink 60 Amp Yellow — Description Cavity Power Memory Seat – If Equipped Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle Motor/ Flex Fuel – If Equipped Headlamp Wash/ Manifold Tuning Valve – If Equipped Power Sliding Door Module/Anti–Theft Module – If Equipped HVAC Rear Blower, Radiator Fan Motor Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main J14 J15 J17 J18 J19 J20 J21 J22 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Cartridge Fuse 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 20 Amp Blue 60 Amp Yellow 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue 25 Amp Natural MiniFuse — Description — Rear Window Defogger Front Blower — Starter Solenoid — — Powertrain Control Module Trans Range Radiator Fan — Front Wiper LO/HI — Front/Rear Washer — Sunroof Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M1 Cartridge Fuse — M2 — M3 — 20 Amp Yellow M4 — M5 — 10 Amp Red 25 Amp Natural Cavity MiniFuse 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow M6 Cartridge Fuse — MiniFuse 20 Amp Yellow M7 — 20 Amp Yellow M8 — M9 — 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow Description Cavity Rear Center Brake Lamp/Brake Switch Trailer Lighting, Front Fog Lamps, Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) Front/Rear Axle Locker, Vacuum Pump Motor Trailer Tow Inverter I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 589 Description Power Outlet #1 (ACC), Rain Sensor, Cigar Lighter (Instrument Panel or with Console Rear) Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT) – Center Seat or with Console Rear Front Heated Seat – If Equipped Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped 7 590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity M10 Cartridge Fuse — M11 — M12 — M13 — MiniFuse 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 30 Amp Green 20 Amp Yellow Description M14 Cartridge Fuse — M15 — M16 — 10 Amp Red M17 — 15 Amp Blue M18 — 15 Amp Blue Cavity Ignition Off Draw — Video System, Satellite Radio, DVD, Hands-Free Module, Universal Garage Door Opener, Vanity Lamp, Streaming Video Module – If Equipped Climate Control System Amplifier/Radio Instrument Cluster, SIREN, Clock Module, Multi-Function Control Switch – If Equipped I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MiniFuse 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow Description Trailer Tow – If Equipped Rear View Mirror, Instrument Cluster, Multi-Function Control Switch, Tire Pressure Monitor, Glow Plug Module – If Equipped Airbag Module/ Occupant Classification Module Left Tail/License/ Park Lamp, Running Lamps Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M19 Cartridge Fuse — M20 — Cavity M21 — M22 — M23 — M24 — MiniFuse 25 Amp Natural 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 25 Amp Natural M25 Cartridge Fuse — MiniFuse 20 Amp Yellow M26 — 10 Amp Red M27 — 10 Amp Red Horn M28 — Horn M29 — Rear Wiper M30 — M31 — 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow Description Cavity Powertrain Instrument Cluster Interior Light, Switch Bank, Steering Column Module, Switch Steering Wheel Powertrain I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 591 Description Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – If Equipped Power Mirror Switch, Driver Window Switch Wireless Control Module, Keyless Entry Module Powertrain, Transmission Control Module Occupant Classification Module Rear Wiper Module, Power Folding Mirror Back-Up Lamps 7 592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M32 Cartridge Fuse — MiniFuse 10 Amp Red M33 — M34 — 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red Cavity M35 — 10 Amp Red Description M36 Cartridge Fuse — MiniFuse 20 Amp Yellow M37 — 10 Amp Red M38 — 25 Amp Natural Cavity Airbag Module, THATCHUM – If Equipped Powertrain Park Assist, Heater Climate Control Module, Headlamp Wash, Compass, Rear Camera, Door Lamps, Flashlight, Relay Diesel Cabin Heater, Rad Fan Diesel – If Equipped Heated Mirrors Description Power Outlet #3 (Instrument Panel or with Console Center) Antilock Brakes, Stability Control, Stop Lamp, Fuel Pump Door Lock/Unlock Motors, Liftgate Lock/Unlock Motors The heated mirrors, lower instrument panel power outlet and removable floor console, when in the front position are fused with self-resetting fuses that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The power seats are fused by a 30 Amp circuit breaker located under the driver’s seat. The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit breaker located under the instrument panel near the I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593 steering column. If you experience temporary or perma- REPLACEMENT BULBS nent loss of these systems, see your authorized dealer for service. LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb Number Center & Rear Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 VEHICLE STORAGE Center & Rear Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than Front Door Courtesy Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 21 days, you may want to take steps to protect your Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped . . . . . 578 battery. You may do the following: Instrument Cluster Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC74 • Remove the 20 Amp mini-fuse in the Totally Inte- Liftgate Lamp(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 grated Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . PC579 Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 194 Draw (IOD). Visor Vanity Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6501966 • Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery. NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of for replacement instructions. service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com- and should not be used for replacement. pressor damage when the system is started again. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE LIGHT BULBS – Exterior Bulb Number Headlamp – (Low and High Beam Halogen) . . . . . H11 Headlamp (HID – If Equipped) Low Beam . . . . . . D1S Fog Lamp – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11 Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . PY27/7W or 3757A Rear Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757A Rear Tail, Stop, and Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157 Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 BULB REPLACEMENT High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. WARNING! A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Quad Headlamps 5. Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb. 1. Raise the hood to access the high or low beam bulbs at the rear of the headlamp housing. Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp 595 1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp 2. Release the two tabs on the side of the connector and housing. remove the connector from the bulb. 2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the 3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the headlamp housing, then pull the bulb out. headlamp housing. 3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the 4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp housing. into the headlamp housing. CAUTION! Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Front Side Marker Lamp Fog Lamp 1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp NOTE: Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of housing. the fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air NOTE: Access is somewhat limited. You may have to dam. remove the inner fender well or remove the headlamp housing for bulb replacement. 1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on the air dam, twist the bulb counterclockwise, and remove 2. Twist the socket and remove from the headlamp bulb. housing, then pull the bulb out. 3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp housing. CAUTION! Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 2. Disconnect wire harness from the bulb. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597 3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and reinstall the bulb by twisting clockwise. Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And Backup Lamp 1. Raise the liftgate. 2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to disengage the two ball studs. NOTE: • If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to scratch the paint. • The PRY location is best closest to the studs while dislodging them separately. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Twist the socket and remove it from the lamp assem- License Lamp The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light bly. bar and above the license plate. 4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket. 1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking 5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and pull lamp assembly. down on the lamp assembly for removal. Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable and pull the bulb out to remove. separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer. 3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599 FLUID CAPACITIES U.S. Metric Fuel (Approximate) 20 Gallons 76 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters Cooling System * 3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5 13.4 Quarts 12.6 Liters Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rear heater. 7 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant Five Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent. Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent. RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]) 87 Octane I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601 Chassis Component Automatic Transmission Brake Master Cylinder Power Steering Reservoir Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product. MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids. MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product. 7 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS 䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604 ▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 606 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: M A I N T E N A N C E 604 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be done S anytime a malfunction is suspected. On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change Depending on operating conditions, the message may indicator system. The oil change indicator system will appear as early as 3,500 miles (5 630 km) since last reset. remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within scheduled maintenance. the next 500 miles (805 km). C H E D U L E S On 8 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NOTE: • The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated. • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time. • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, whichever comes first. Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in 605 M A I N T E N A At Each Stop For Fuel N C • Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a E “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. fully warmed engine is shut OFF. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD, SAFE or MIN mark. S C H E D U • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if L E required. S I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 8 M A I N T E N A N C E 606 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES At Each Oil Change Once A Month • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Change the engine oil filter. damage. • Inspect the brake hoses and lines. • Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals • Open the left and right door (slowly) and inspect for as required. excessive dirt. If noise exist wipe clean and apply • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake krytox lube to the door rollers. master cylinder, and the power steering and add as S C CAUTION! needed. H E • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct D operation. U L E S 8 Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle. Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 8,000 miles (13 000 km). Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code 607 M 16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 16,000 miles (26 000 km). ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or 12 months. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 608 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or N T 18 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of C irregular wear, even if it occurs before E S C H E D U L E S 8 24,000 miles (39 000 km). ❏ Inspect the CV joints. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code 32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 32,000 miles (52 000 km). ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 40,000 miles (65 000 km). Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center 609 M Date Dealer Code ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 48,000 miles (78 000 km). ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the CV joints. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 610 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or N T 42 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of C irregular wear, even if it occurs before E 56,000 miles (91 000 km). S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code 64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 64,000 miles (104 000 km). ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter. ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. ❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 72,000 miles (117 000 km). ❏ Inspect the CV joints. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center 611 M Date Dealer Code ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 80,000 miles (130 000 km). ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter. ❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) whichever comes first. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 612 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or N T 66 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of C irregular wear, even if it occurs before E 88,000 miles (143 000 km). S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code 96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km). ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter. ❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.6L Engine). ❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the CV joints. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 104,000 miles (169 000 km). ❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months whichever comes first. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code 613 M 112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 112,000 miles (182 000 km). ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 614 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or N T 90 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of C irregular wear, even if it occurs before E S C H E D U L E S 8 120,000 miles (195 000 km). ❏ Inspect the CV joints. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s). Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code 128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 128,000 miles (208 000 km). ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 136,000 miles (221 000 km). Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code 615 M 144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 144,000 miles (234 000 km). ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the CV joints. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 616 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or N T 114 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of C irregular wear, even if it occurs before E 152,000 miles (247 000 km). S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Repair Order # Date Dealer Code Signature, Authorized Service Center I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. 617 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS 䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 621 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 ▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 622 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 ▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 622 ▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 9 620 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 ▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 ▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 621 the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it Prepare For The Appointment is advisable to make these arrangements when you call If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the for an appointment. right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services. current problem. Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. Prepare A List We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the service advisor know. facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner. vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 9 622 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 solved with this process. Phone: (800) 247–9753 • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 ship. They want to know if you need assistance. Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 • If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer In Mexico contact: center. Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109 ter should include the following information: Mexico, D. F. • Owner’s name and address In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) • Authorized dealership name • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) • Vehicle delivery date and mileage I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. 623 the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French). The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Service Contract Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents. repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 9 624 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. WARNING! Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. MOPAR姞 PARTS MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 625 If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer. In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov. cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 9 626 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE • Service Manuals • Owner’s Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the information that students and professional technicians assistance of service and engineering specialists to need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vemaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, vehicle, system, and/or components is written in capabilities and safety tips. straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, Call toll free at: and charts. • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) • Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. • 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: • www.techauthority.com I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. 627 significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction Grades The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades. mance. Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on WARNING! the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics. actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 9 628 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 630 INDEX Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 572 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 561 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419,566 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398,406,565 Air Conditioning System, Zone Control . . . . . . . . 398 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,414 Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,84 Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,88,105,297 Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,81,84 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 79,81,84 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571,599 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX 631 Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . 103 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 . . . . . 466 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107,593 . . . . . 564 . . . . . 540 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 . . . . . 27 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 . . . . . 207 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 . . . . . 105 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 406 Automatic Transaxle Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431,577 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578,601 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyless Transmitter Replacement Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... ..... ..... (RKE) ..... ..... I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 632 INDEX Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,494 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Cargo Compartment Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,397 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,555 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,91 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329,338 Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX Connector UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 352 Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Console, Removable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 573 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570,574 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 633 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . 571,599,600 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,585 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106,412 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 634 INDEX Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Domelight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . 314 E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . Electronic Brake Control System Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 433 118 248 452 453 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 217 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229,304 Emergency, In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522,531 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 555 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,104,494 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491,599 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558,599,600 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559,599 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 85 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,104,494 635 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,562 Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419,566 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560,600 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Flashers Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107,290 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 636 INDEX Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495,496 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,499 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Fluid Level Checks Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,310 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 600 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491,599 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207,290,596 Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) Seating . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX 637 314 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 495 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501,504 499 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501,504 586 Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 499,500,554 Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Gauges Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16,29,159,490 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Fuel Saver . . Fuel, Flexible Fueling . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 638 INDEX . . . 431 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 . . 208 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 . . . 457 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 . . . 508 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,204 . . 236 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . 201 . . . 264 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,13 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,318,426 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,290 Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,318 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hitches Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hook, Coat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . 94 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107,202 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,88,105,297 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 639 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593,594 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 456 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207,290,596 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,204 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,310 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 640 INDEX Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 295 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,595 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593,594 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596,597 SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 293 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107,595,597 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 290 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264,501,503 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Locks Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: . . . . . 564 . . . . . 557 . . . . . 604 . . . . . 248 . . 295,555 . . . . . 625 INDEX Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,196 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Mode Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557,624 641 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Navigation System (Uconnect™ gps) . . . . . . . . . . 229 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,81,85 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 78,79,81,84 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,293,313 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . 292,293,313 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558,600 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560,600 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 642 INDEX Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559,599 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560,599 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554,555 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116,117 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 232 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,521 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,625 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 466 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 248 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446,447 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 570,573 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,414 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 395 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 643 Removable Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . 292,293,313 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,93 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . Safety Checks Outside Vehicle Safety Defects, Reporting . . . Safety Information, Tire . . . . Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 . . 107 . . 624 . . 460 . . 104 57,104 . . 349 10 644 INDEX Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,105 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 66 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,90,91 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 571,600 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329,338 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Short Message Service (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107,207,208,290,595,597 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474,475,524 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Steering Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446,447 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 645 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,593 Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418,593 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 75 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 406 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 646 INDEX Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466,467 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 300,522 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 482 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 466 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460,470 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107,470,627 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522,531 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Transaxle Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431,577 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578,601 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 647 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 236 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,290,595,597 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 129 260 627 352 236 491 582 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 648 INDEX Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467,501,503 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418,593 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 Washer Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,248 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Rear Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 Zone Control (Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . 398 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Chrysler Group LLC 12Y531-126-AE I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5th Edition Printed in U.S.A.
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Author : 5th Edition Create Date : 2012:02:02 16:14:35Z Keywords : 941019 Modify Date : 2015:06:12 14:52:49-05:00 Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 81.157285, 2014/12/12-00:43:15 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 8.3.1 (Windows) Creator Tool : XPP Metadata Date : 2015:06:12 14:52:49-05:00 Format : application/pdf Title : 2012 Chrysler Town and Country Owner's Guide Description : 12Y531-126-AE Creator : 5th Edition Subject : 941019 Document ID : uuid:e4a9350c-44bf-44f1-ac43-f3e13a0cd33a Instance ID : uuid:eedb5be1-6f98-471c-9bd3-d324147ccbd9 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 652EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools